JP6240852B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a plurality of display devices.

In a conventional gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, an auxiliary game is executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated based on the result of the auxiliary game. What gives game value is common.

In such a gaming machine, the first sub display device and the second sub display device are arranged in front of the main display device, and the first sub display device and the second sub display device are arranged based on establishment of a predetermined condition. Some have been proposed to open and close by turning (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-131424 A

By the way, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that an effective display effect cannot be performed although a plurality of display devices are provided.

Accordingly, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game by performing an effective display effect with a plurality of display means. Objective.

The present invention displays an effect image relating to the auxiliary game in a gaming machine capable of executing an auxiliary game based on establishment of a predetermined start condition and assigning a predetermined game value based on the result of the auxiliary game. First display means capable of being displayed, second display means arranged so as to be separated from the first display means, and capable of displaying an effect image relating to the auxiliary game, the first display means and the first display means constitute a display control means for controlling display of the second display means, said auxiliary game initial screen I substantially rectangular display portions are adjacent if the said first display means and the second display means during execution of the Performing a coalescence suggesting effect that suggests that the coalescence operation is performed by swinging at least one of the first display device and the second display device; Is possible Comprising a body suggested means, and the united operation means, so that the facing sides of the display unit adjacent when to perform the united operation in the first display unit and the second display means is a plurality of embodiments And the display control means is independent of each of the first display means and the second display means when the coalescence operation is not performed by the coalescence operation means. and the independent image display means for displaying an effect image that, when said the united operation is performed by the combined operation means, integral effect as the straddle wants to one body on the first display unit and the second display means comprises a one-body image display means for displaying an image, wherein the integrated image display means, depending on the display unit the manner opposing sides take between said first display means and the second display means by the united operation Said one It is different front view shape of the surface, characterized in that to enable displaying the integral effect image.

The “auxiliary game” may be a game that can be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied, or a game value may be given only when the game can be played at normal time and the predetermined condition is satisfied. . “Game value” is, for example, given a prize ball (prize ball data) in a pachinko machine (
Payouts / additions) and special gaming states (a state that is advantageous to players such as big wins and small wins), etc. In slot machines, award medals (award medal data) are given (payouts / additions) and special gaming states (bonuses) Or a state advantageous to a player such as ART).

According to the present invention, an effective display effect can be performed by the first display means and the second display means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine when a glass frame is opened according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board of the state which attached the center frame of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the game board, center frame, and rendering device unit of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a game board in the state where a center frame of a 1st embodiment of the present invention was removed. It is a disassembled perspective view of the center frame of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the distribution apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is an exploded perspective view of the distribution apparatus arrange | positioned at a center frame, (B) was installed in the center frame It is a front view of a distribution apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of the production | presentation apparatus unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the unit base member of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the lower production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the lower production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a back view of the movable part of a lower production | presentation apparatus, (B) is a perspective view of a lower production | presentation apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of the back side production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the left shutter unit of the back side production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the rotation operation | movement of the rotation door of the left shutter unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the sliding operation | movement of the left shutter unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the lower decoration unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the intermediate member which comprises the lower decoration unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the decoration member attached to the intermediate member of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the lower decoration unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the front view which expanded a part of lower decoration unit, (B) is the BB surface of (A). It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the lower decoration unit along. It is a perspective view of the flow path component which comprises the lower decoration unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the upper decoration unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the top production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the light-guide plate which comprises the movable display unit of the upper stage production apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a cross-sectional view of the top effect device of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a movable display unit and a drive mechanism of the upper stage production device of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the top production device in the state where the fixed base of the 1st embodiment of the present invention was removed. It is a disassembled perspective view of the right part production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional perspective view of the right part production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the movable decoration unit and drive mechanism of the right part production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a reverse view of the right part production | presentation apparatus in the state which removed the fixed base of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the upper decoration member of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a left upper expansion perspective view of the upper decoration member in the state where the game board of the 1st embodiment of the present invention was attached. FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of the periphery of the universal start gate in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of a special prize opening solenoid in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 31 is a rear perspective view of the peripheral portion of the universal start gate in FIG. 30 of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment state of the static elimination unit in the state by which the glass frame of the 1st Embodiment of this invention was open | released. It is a perspective exploded view of the static elimination unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a back surface perspective view of the static elimination unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the static elimination unit in FIG. 34 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the operation | movement aspect of the static elimination unit when accommodated in the frame of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the operation | movement aspect of the static elimination unit when accommodated in the frame of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the static elimination unit of the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the specification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment of the present invention, (A) is the specification of the variable display game, (B) is a big hit state (special game) when winning the special figure variable display game (C) is the round distribution table 1 including the selection probability of the number of rounds in the big hit state when the game ball passes through the lottery gate, (D) is the case when the game ball passes through the fixed gate The round distribution table 2 including the number of rounds in the big hit state is shown. It is a figure explaining the state transition in the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block block diagram which shows the control system centering on the game control apparatus of the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block block diagram which shows the control system centering on the production | presentation control apparatus of the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the first half part of the main process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the latter half part of the main process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the distribution status update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the passage detection sensor monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure pending | holding information determination process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change start process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the special figure 1 change start process performed at the time of the start of a 1st special figure change display game, (B) Is a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the change start information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a 1st special figure fluctuation display game, (B) is a 2nd special figure fluctuation display. This is the case for games. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure display process transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure display process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit round determination process transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit round determination process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 of the fanfare / interval of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the presentation mode information check process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time reduction fluctuation frequency update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time-short end setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) shows the big hit end setting process 1, (B) shows the big hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol fluctuation | variation control process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the radio wave fraud monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process performed by the microcomputer for main control (1stCPU) of the production | presentation control apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the interruption process in the presentation control apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process performed by the microcomputer (2ndCPU) for video control of the production | presentation control apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st scene control process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the main display apparatus (variable display apparatus) of 1st Embodiment of this invention, and a sub-display, (A) is a customer waiting state, (B) is other than a customer waiting state. Show. It is a figure which shows the structure of the sub display of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a display screen of a sub display, (B) is a general game auxiliary display area, (C) is a special figure change. The state display symbol (4th symbol) in the display game is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a fluctuation | variation of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which looked at the back side production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the upper right upper part, (A) has shown the state before slide operation | movement of a shutter unit, (B) has shown the state after slide operation | movement. It is the figure which looked at the back side production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front, (A) is the state before a rotation door rotates, (B) is after a rotation door rotates. Indicates the state. It is a figure explaining the lower production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the state before operation | movement of a lower decoration member, (B) has shown the state after operation | movement of a lower decoration member. It is a figure which shows the main display apparatus and sub-display from the start of a variable display game to the temporary stop in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the development effect performed with an upper production | presentation apparatus (sub-display) after the temporary stop of a variable display game in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right part presentation operation | movement control process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example which displays description of operation | movement of the right part direction production apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the right part direction production apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the right part direction production apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the result of the production | presentation by the right part production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit round determination process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the round determination method description process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the firing mode setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the discharge timing alerting | reporting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the gate passage sound corresponding to the round number determination command of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the status notification image corresponding to the distribution status command of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows from presentation of the big hit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention to presentation of the description of the big hit round determination method. The description of the game for determining the big hit round of the 1st Embodiment of this invention has shown the state currently displayed on the main display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display of the candidate which the firing alerting | reporting aspect for determining the jackpot round of the 1st Embodiment of this invention selects. It is a figure which shows selection of the candidate which the firing alerting | reporting aspect for determining the jackpot round of the 1st Embodiment of this invention selects. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting timing of the alerting | reporting timing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is waiting, (B) has shown launching. It is a figure which shows an example of selection of the designated jackpot determination method of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is at the time of selection, (B) has shown after confirmation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right strike warning command reception process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a figure explaining an example of the right-handed warning of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a game ball | bowl with a 1st passing gate part or a 2nd passing gate part by performing a right-hand hit during a normal game. (B) shows a state where a right-handed warning is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game machine error monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the human sensitive sensor error process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the arrangement | positioning and detection range of the magnetic sensor and human sensor of a 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the aspect of the error alerting | reporting of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board of the state which attached the center frame (front surface component) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the production | presentation apparatus unit (back surface component) of the state which removed the center frame of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the upper stage production apparatus and right part direction apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a case where an upper stage production apparatus and a right part production apparatus are in a reference position, (B) is The case where only the right part direction device rotates is shown. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the upper stage production apparatus and the right part production apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a case where only an upper stage production apparatus rotates, (B) is an upper stage production apparatus and right The case where both of the section effect devices rotate is shown. It is a figure which shows the aspect which the narrow frame part of an upper stage production | presentation apparatus and the narrow frame part of a right part production | presentation apparatus overlap and contact in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the aspect which the side surface of an upper stage production device and the side surface of a right part production | presentation apparatus contact | abut in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the aspect which provides a control part in the right part production | presentation apparatus in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the aspect which provides a decoration part (shielding means) in the right part production | presentation apparatus in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the aspect which provides a decoration part (shielding means) in both an upper stage production | presentation apparatus and a right part production | presentation apparatus in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining arrangement | positioning of the left part production | presentation apparatus and lower raising / lowering unit of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the slide operation | movement of the left part production | presentation apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining rotation operation of the left part production device of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention, (A) is a figure which looked at rotation operation from the front, and (B) looked at rotation operation from the upper part. FIG. It is a figure explaining the 1st modification of the left part production | presentation apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 2nd modification of the left part production | presentation apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation by the left part production | presentation apparatus and lower raising / lowering unit of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the state which the left part production | presentation apparatus slid to the center of the fluctuation | variation display apparatus, (B) Shows a state in which an effect by the lower lift unit is being executed after the left effect device rotates. It is a block diagram explaining the structure of the image control part of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the screen buffered by VDP of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) shows a main display, (B) shows a sub display. It is a block diagram explaining the structure of the image control part of the modification of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the screen buffered by VDP of the modification of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a main display and a 3rd sub display, (B) is a 1st sub display. And a second sub-display. It is a figure explaining the example of a screen display by the main display and each sub-display of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) shows a normal game state, (B) shows in a general electric power support state. It is a figure explaining the modification of the screen display by the main indicator and each sub indicator in the normal power support state of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the screen display by the 3rd sub indicator of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the screen display by a main display and each sub display in the case of digesting start memory in the memory order of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention, (A) is a normal game state, (B ) Indicates the normal power support status. It is a figure which shows the example of the light emission aspect of the holding | maintenance display LED of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the light emission aspect in case the 4th design LED shows whether the special figure fluctuation display game of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is running. It is a figure which shows the example of the light emission mode in the case of displaying the result of a special figure fluctuation display game by 4th design LED of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st main process performed by the microcomputer for main control (1stCPU) of the presentation control apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time information storage process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the regular effect aspect determination table for determining the aspect of the regular effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the execution information storage area of the regular effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the regular effect notification information of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is regular effect invalid alert information, (B) is regular effect valid alert information. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st scene control process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pending | holding advance notice control process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the notice aspect of the hold display of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) shows the aspect for every game state, (B) shows the detail of the notice aspect in a general power support state. It is a figure explaining an example of the reservation notice in the normal game state of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example (the first half) of the reservation notice in the normal power support state of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example (middle board) of the reservation notice in the general electric power support state of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example (latter half) of the reservation notice in the normal power support state of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the regular effect execution process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a fluctuation | variation of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the operation notification effect setting process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example about the notice selection table of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the unification notice effect setting process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the unification effect aspect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the aspect selection table in a normal game state, (B) is the aspect selection table in a general electric power support state, (C) is each The table which shows the response | compatibility of the content and reliability of an operation | movement aspect is shown. It is a figure explaining an example of the unification notice effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the unification notice effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the unification announcement effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 1st modification of the unification notice effect which all the three types of sub-displays of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention unite. It is a figure explaining the 2nd modification of the unification announcement effect which all the three types of sub-displays of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention unite. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the expansion | deployment (implying) notice effect setting process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the aspect of the expansion | deployment (implying) notice effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a mode selection table in a normal gaming state and a reversible state, (B) is a general electric power support state and A mode selection table in the non-reversible state, (C) shows a table showing correspondence between the contents and reliability of each operation mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the expansion | deployment (implying) notice effect in the normal game state (reversible) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the expansion | deployment (implying) notice effect in the normal game state (reversible) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the expansion | deployment (implying) notice effect in the general power support state (inversion impossible) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the image displayed on a 3rd sub-display at the time of inversion of the left part production | presentation apparatus in the expansion | deployment (implying) notice effect of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the step-up (SU) notice mode setting process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the step number selection table of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example (first half) of the step-up notice effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example (latter half) of the step-up notice effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the short step skip notice (2 step skip) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the short step skip notice (3 step skip) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the long step skip notice (2 step skip) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the long step skip notice (3 step skip) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the presentation execution time of the various step-up notice (step number 5) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the step-up notice effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the image displayed on a 3rd sub-display at the time of inversion of the left part production | presentation apparatus in the long step skip notice effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the image displayed on a 3rd sub display at the time of inversion of the left part production | presentation apparatus in the short step skip notice effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the raising / lowering notice aspect setting process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the aspect of the raising / lowering announcement effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) shows the operation | movement mode selection table in a normal game state, (B) shows the operation | movement mode selection table in a general electric power support state. . It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the raising / lowering notice effect execution process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the raising / lowering announcement effect in case the pending | holding advance notice of the start memory of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is not performed. It is a figure explaining an example of the raising / lowering notice effect in case the pending | holding notice of the start memory of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is performed by the operation timing of a movable unit. It is a figure explaining the modification of the raising / lowering notice effect in case the pending | holding notice of the start memory of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is performed by the operation timing of a movable unit.

A gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the description of the embodiment, the front, rear, left, and right refer to the direction viewed from the game board (the direction viewed from the player).
Shall be pointed to.

(First embodiment)
[Game machine configuration]
First, with reference to FIG.1 and FIG.2, the whole structure of the game machine 1 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 closed.
FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with only the glass frame 6 opened.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 includes an opening / closing frame 4 whose right side portion is attached to a main body frame 2 fixed to an island facility via a hinge 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. The open / close frame 4 includes a front frame 5 and a glass frame 6.

The front frame 5 is a frame having a storage part (game board storage part) 5a capable of storing the game board 30 (see FIG. 3). A game board 30 is disposed on the front frame 5, and a glass frame 6 having a cover glass 6 a that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 are
Each can be opened individually. For example, only the glass frame 6 can be opened to access the game area 31 (see FIG. 3) of the game board 30. Further, by opening the front frame 5 in a state where the glass frame 6 is not opened, the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 (see FIG. 4) arranged on the back side of the game board 30, the front frame 5 It is possible to access the power supply device 800, the payout control device 640, and the like arranged at the bottom of the back surface.

A storage unit 641 for storing game balls replenished from a replenishing device (not shown) installed in the island facility is provided at the upper rear surface of the front frame 5, and a storage unit 6 is provided on the back side of the left side of the front frame 5.
A payout unit 642 for paying out the game balls flowing down from 41 to the upper plate 11a is provided.
The payout control device 640 is a device that controls the operation of the payout unit 642.

A decorative member 7 is disposed around the cover glass 6 a of the glass frame 6. Decorative member 7
The frame decoration device 21 (refer to FIG. 44) configured by LEDs or the like is accommodated in the interior of the interior, and the light emission state of the decoration member 7 can be adjusted by controlling the frame decoration device 21.

An illumination unit 8 is disposed above the glass frame 6, and a movable illumination 9 is disposed on the left and right sides of the illumination unit 8. The illumination unit 8 contains an illumination member such as an LED inside,
A light emission effect is performed according to the gaming state. The movable illumination 9 includes an illumination member such as an LED and a frame effect device 22 (see FIG. 44) configured by an illumination drive motor that drives the illumination member. The frame effect device 22 of the movable illumination 9 is controlled to rotationally drive the illumination member according to the gaming state. In addition, the illumination member arrange | positioned inside the illumination unit 8 and the movable illumination 9 also comprises some frame decoration apparatuses 21 (refer FIG. 44).

Further, a reinforcing sheet metal 6b is disposed on the rear surface of the glass frame 6, and the reinforcing sheet metal 6b has a conducting portion 6c that protrudes rearward so as to be in contact with a charge eliminating unit 900 (see FIG. 3) of a game board 30 described later. . The conducting portion 6c functions as a ground member, and the conducting portion 6c comes into contact with the conducting member 901 (see FIG. 34) of the static elimination unit 900 to remove static electricity charged in the game board 30.

The gaming machine 1 includes an upper speaker 10a and a lower speaker 10 that emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.
b. The upper speaker 10 a is disposed on both upper side portions of the glass frame 6, and the lower speaker 10 b is disposed on the lower left corner of the front frame 5.

A gaming state notification LED 12 for notifying abnormality in the gaming machine 1 is provided on the upper right side of the left movable illumination 9. When an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine 1, the gaming state notification LED 12 is turned on or blinks, and a notification sound for notifying the abnormality is output from the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b.

Abnormalities occurring in the gaming machine 1 include failure of the gaming machine 1 and implementation of fraud. The illegal act includes, for example, an act of illegally manipulating the trajectory of the launched game ball with a magnet, an act of oscillating radio waves with respect to a start switch of the gaming machine 1 and the like. These frauds are
It is detected by detecting magnetism with the magnetic sensor 23 (see FIG. 43) or detecting radio waves with the radio wave sensor 24 (see FIG. 43).

Further, the act of opening the open / close frame 4 illegally is also included in the illegal act. The open / close state of the front frame 5 is detected by the front frame open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 43), and the open / closed state of the glass frame 6 is detected by the glass frame open detection switch 26 (see FIG. 43).

An upper plate unit 11 including an upper plate 11 a is provided at the lower front portion of the glass frame 6. Top plate 1
The game balls stored in 1a are supplied to the ball launch unit 13 provided at the lower part of the front frame 5.

A lower pan 14 is installed in the front frame 5 below the ball launch unit 13, and an operation handle 15 for controlling the operation of the ball launch unit 13 is installed in the lower right corner of the front frame 5. . When the player turns the operation handle 15, the ball launch unit 13 launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 11 a to the game area 31 of the game board 30. In the lower plate 14,
A ball removal mechanism 16 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 14 to the outside is provided.

The upper plate unit 11 is provided with an effect button 17 for receiving an operation input from a player on the front side of the upper plate 11a. Further, a selection button 29 is provided on the outer periphery of the production button 17.
Is arranged. When the player operates the effect button 17, the change display device 35 is operated.
In the variable display game in (see FIG. 4), it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened, and it is possible to change the effect pattern (effect mode) in the normal gaming state. The fluctuation display game includes a special figure fluctuation display game and a common figure fluctuation display game. In the present specification, when the fluctuation display game is simply referred to, the special figure fluctuation display game is indicated.

The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a specific gaming state has not occurred. The specific game state is, for example, a probability change state (probability change state) with a high probability of a lottery in a variable display game,
Floating display game lottery probability is normal probability but variable display game can improve the number of executions per unit time (short time variation state), big hit game state (special game state), or small hit game State, etc.

Here, the probability variation state is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of fluctuation display games are executed (number-of-times type), and a predetermined probability falling lottery. Continuing until it is done (falling lottery type) is considered.

In the loop type, whether or not the probability variation state is generated is determined by the big hit symbol random number and the probability variation state is generated, and in the case of the number cut type or the falling lottery type, the probability variation state is always generated when the big hit occurs. However, a winning device or the like having a specific area may be provided, and a probability variation state may be generated when a game ball passes through the specific area.

Below the decorative member 7 of the glass frame 6, a ball lending button 18 that is operated when a player rents a game ball, and a discharge button 19 that is operated to discharge a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown). Are arranged. Further, a balance display unit 20 for displaying a balance of a prepaid card or the like is provided between the ball lending button 18 and the discharge button 19.

[Game board configuration]
A gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30 with the center frame (front component) 34 attached thereto. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board 30, the center frame 34, and the rendering device unit (back surface component) 200. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the game board 30 with the center frame 34 removed. The front constituent member and the rear constituent member may be collectively referred to as a center case.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 30 is a rectangular game board 32 made of plastic or the like.
By providing a metal guide rail 32a and a conductive resin partition member 32b on the surface, a substantially circular game region 31 is partitioned. The game board 32 is a transparent member that can be seen through the back. Game board 32, guide rail 32 a that partitions game area 31, and partition member 3
The game board main body is configured by 2b.

In the upper right corner of the game board 30, there is provided a static elimination unit 900 that releases and removes static electricity charged on the game board 32 to the glass frame 6. The details of the static elimination unit 900 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Clamp-like fixing members (provided on the front frame 5 at the upper right corner and lower right corner of the game board 30)
A fixed receiving portion 32c is formed to be fixed by a not-shown), and an engagement hook 5b (see FIG. 2) provided on the front frame 5 can be engaged with the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the game board 30. An engagement receiving portion 32d is formed. The game board 30 is stored in the storage part 5a of the front frame 5 by engaging the fixing member and the engagement hook 5b of the front frame 5 with the fixed receiving part 32c and the engagement receiving part 32d of the game board 30. It is fixed to the front surface of the front frame 5.

In the game area 31, a center frame (front component) 34 having an opening (display window) 34a is disposed. An opening 32e having a shape along the outer periphery of the center frame 34 is formed in the game board 32, and the center frame 34 is fitted into the opening 32e from the front.

As shown in FIG. 4, on the back side of the game board 30 is provided an effect device unit (back surface component) 200 composed of various effect devices, and on the back side of the effect device unit 200, a display unit 70 and main control are provided. A unit 80 is provided. The display unit 70 includes a variable display device 35 as a main display device, and an effect control device 700 that controls effects and the like displayed on the variable display device 35. The main control unit 80 includes a game control device 600 and a base member 81 for rotatably mounting the game control device 600 to the effect device unit 200.
And comprising.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the variable display device 35 of the display unit 70 includes a display unit 35 a that can display a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information. Center frame 3
4 is provided in correspondence with the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35. The display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 is visible through the opening (display window unit) 34a of the center frame 34. It has become.

The display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 is a liquid crystal display capable of displaying an arbitrary image, and is based on the progress of the game, such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game on the display screen. An image is displayed. The variable display device 35 is configured such that a plurality of variable display areas (for example, three variable display areas on the left side, the center, and the right side) are set on the display unit 35a, and independent images can be displayed in each of the display areas. ing. Note that the variable display device 35 is not limited to a device including a liquid crystal display, and may include a display such as an EL or a CRT.

As shown in FIG. 3, in the game area 31 on the left side of the center frame 34, when a game ball passes, a normal figure start gate 36 that establishes a start condition for a normal symbol (normal figure) variable display game is established.
Is disposed. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 31 passes through the usual figure start gate 36, the usual figure variation display game is executed.

In the game area 31 on the lower left side of the center frame 34, three general winning holes 40 are arranged, and in the game area 31 on the lower right side of the center frame 34, one general prize opening 40 is arranged.

The game area 31 below the center frame 34 is provided with a first start winning opening (first start winning area) 37 for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game, and a second start winning opening ( A second start winning area 38) is provided. The second start winning opening 38 is provided with a pair of movable members 38a whose upper side is opened in an inverted “C” shape and converted into a state in which game balls can easily flow. When the game ball wins the first start winning opening 37 or the second starting winning opening 38, a special symbol (special drawing) variable display game is executed.

The pair of movable members 38a of the second start winning prize port 38 normally maintains a closed state (a winning regulation state that is disadvantageous for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the first start prize opening 37 is provided above the second start prize opening 38, the game ball cannot win the second start prize opening 38 when the movable member 38a is in the closed state. It has become.

The movable member 38a is used when the result of the usual map change display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode.
Opened in a reverse “C” shape via the general electric solenoid 27 (see FIG. 43), and changed to an open state in which the game ball can easily flow into the second start winning opening 38 (a win easy state advantageous to the player). (conversion)
To do.

The movable member 38a is controlled by a game control device 600 described later. The game control device 600 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state or increases the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state compared to the normal gaming state in the probability variation state or the short time state. It is said to be in the state of ordinary power support.

In the game area 31 between the first start winning opening 37 and the right general winning opening 40, the first winning prize is obtained by rotating the upper end side in a direction to be tilted forward by the big winning opening solenoid 28a (see FIG. 43). A first special variable winning device 41 having an attacker-type opening / closing door 41a that opens its mouth is provided. The first special variable winning device 41 converts the state of the first big prize opening from a closed state (blocking state unfavorable to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure display game. In addition, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the first big prize opening. In the first grand prize opening, the lower count switches 605a to 605a are used as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special prize opening.
605 m (see FIG. 43) is provided.

Also, in the upper left part of the center frame 34, a prize winning solenoid 28b (see FIG. 43)
Is provided with a second special variable winning device 42 having a rotating portion 42a that opens the second big winning opening by rotating. Similar to the first special variable winning device 41, the second special variable winning device 42 is in an open state (from a closed state unfavorable to the player) from a state in which the second big winning opening is closed according to the result of the special figure display game. (Special gaming state advantageous to the player), and by allowing the game ball to easily flow into the second big prize opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. . Note that an upper count switch 606 (see FIG. 43) is disposed in the second grand prize opening as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special prize opening.

General winning port 40, first starting winning port 37, second starting winning port 38, first special variable winning device 4
When a game ball wins the 1st 1st grand prize opening and the 2nd big prize opening of the 2nd special variable prize winning device 42, the payout control device 640 pays out the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening. Unit 642
To the upper plate 11a. In general, the number of winning balls (for example, 15) when winning the grand prize opening is the largest, followed by the general winning opening 40 (for example, 10) and the start winning opening (for example, 3),
The number of winning balls at the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening or the number of winning balls at the first starting winning prize opening and the second starting winning prize opening may be different.

The game area 31 below the second start winning opening 38 is provided with an out opening 43 for collecting game balls that have not won the winning opening or the like.

In addition, a special figure fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game, second special figure fluctuation display game) and a common figure fluctuation display game are executed outside the game area 31 and in the lower right portion of the game board 32. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display unit) 51 and a second special figure fluctuation display unit (figure display unit) (figure display game) composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like Special figure 2
Display) 52, a general map change display section (general map display) 53 for a general map change display game, and a memory display section for displaying the start (hold) memory count of each variable display game (special figure 1 hold display) Part 54, special figure 2 hold display part 55, universal figure hold display part 56).

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a high-probability display portion 57 and a short-time state for notifying that the jackpot probability state is a high-probability state from when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the first jackpot occurrence. A game state display unit comprising a short-time state display unit 58 that lights up when it occurs and notifies the occurrence of a short-term state, and the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of opening and closing rounds of the first special variable winning device 41 and the second special variable winning device 42) ) Is displayed.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1, the details of the general map variation display game and the special diagram variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 1, a game is played by launching a game ball from the ball launch unit 13 toward the game area 31. The launched game balls flow down the game area 31 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills and the like arranged in various places in the game area 31, and usually start the gate 3.
6. Win the general winning opening 40, the first starting winning opening 37, the second starting winning opening 38, the first special variable winning device 41 or the second special variable winning device 42, or provided at the bottom of the game area 31. It flows into the out port 43 and is discharged from the game area 31. Then, the general winning port 40, the first starting winning port 37, the second starting winning port 38, the first special variable winning device 41 or the second special variable winning device 4
When a game ball wins 2, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening won is a payout unit 642.
Is discharged to the upper plate 11a.

The general-purpose start gate 36 includes a gate switch 603 (see FIGS. 31 and 43) that detects a game ball that has passed through the general-purpose start gate 36, and a game board via the flange portion 36b while supporting the gate switch 603. A gate member (support member) 36a (see FIG. 31) attached to the main body (game board 32) is provided. When the game ball passes the usual start gate 36,
It is detected by the gate switch 603, and the usual figure display game is executed.

A state in which the normal map variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been played and the normal map variable display game has not been completed, When the 2 start winning opening 38 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes the normal start gate 36, the stored number is added (+1) if the normal start memory number is less than the upper limit number.

In the normal map start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit error of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored, and when this hit determination random number value coincides with the determination value, the normal map change display is performed. A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the game.

The universal map display game is executed by a universal map display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general-purpose) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information varies by blinking this LED. Display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the common figure random number extracted when passing through the common figure start gate 36 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure display unit 53 stops in a hit state and enters a hit state. At this time, when the electric solenoid 27 (see FIG. 43) is driven, the movable member 38a is converted to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the second start winning opening 38 is obtained. Is acceptable.

The winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 37 and the winning to the second start winning opening 38 are detected by the first start opening switch 601 (see FIG. 43) and the second start opening switch 602 (see FIG. 43). The A game ball won in the first start winning opening 37 is detected as a start winning ball in the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a predetermined upper limit number, and a game ball won in the second start winning opening 38 Is detected as the start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When detecting the starting winning ball of the special figure variation display game, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted. These random numbers are stored for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 8 times) as special figure start winning memory in the special figure storage area (part of RAM) of the game control device 600.
It is memorized to the limit. The number stored in the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display unit 54 and the special figure 2 hold display unit 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the display unit 35a of the variable display unit 35. Or displayed on a display 480 as a sub display device to be described later.

The game control device 600 executes the first special figure variation display game (first variation display game) on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning to the first start winning opening 37 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 600 executes the second special figure variation display game (second variation display game) with the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning to the second starting prize opening 38 or the second starting memory. .

The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2.
After the identification information is variably displayed on the display 52, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the variation display device 35, a decoration special diagram variation display game for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special diagram variation display game is executed.

In the decorative special symbol variable display game in the variable display device 35, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). The display is performed by starting the variable display (scroll display) in the order of symbols), sequentially stopping the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time, and displaying the result of the special symbol variable display game. In addition, the variable display device 35 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest.

When a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 37 or the second starting winning opening 38 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result of this, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbols, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the variable display device 35 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are arranged).

Thereafter, a special gaming state occurs, and the first special variable winning device 41 and the second special variable winning device 4
2 winning prize solenoid 28a and winning prize solenoid 28b (see FIG. 43)
By energizing, the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the big winning opening provided in the first special variable winning device 41 and the second special variable winning device 42 is opened widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls wins, during which the player opens many game balls. The privilege that it can be acquired is given.

In this embodiment, there is a case where a round number determination game (auxiliary game) described later is executed and a case where it is not executed during the period from when the special result mode is derived until the special game state occurs. You may unify to one side. In addition, special figure 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52
These may be configured as separate displays or as the same display, but are set so that each special figure variation display game is not executed simultaneously.

As for the decorative special figure fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display device 35, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas. It may be executed in the same display device or display area. In this case, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game is not executed simultaneously. The second special figure fluctuation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure fluctuation display game, and the start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game is stored. When the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is executed. The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game may be executed in the order in which the start memory is stored.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the player performs left-handed or right-handed according to the gaming state. A left-handed or right-handed instruction is displayed on the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 so that the player can easily make a game according to the game state.

[Center frame]
Next, the center frame 34 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3, 6, and 7. FIG.
FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the center frame 34. FIG. 7A is an exploded perspective view of the sorting device 90 disposed on the center frame 34, and FIG. 7B is a front view of the sorting device 90 installed on the center frame 34.

As shown in FIG. 6, the center frame (front component) 34 is configured as a transparent ring-shaped (frame-shaped) frame. The center frame 34 is a game board 3 of the game board 30.
The fitting part 34b fitted in the opening 32e (see FIG. 4) formed in 2, the collar part 34c formed in a bowl shape with respect to the fitting part 34b, and the guide part capable of rolling the game ball 34d.
The center frame 34 is disposed in the game area 31 in front of the collar portion 34c.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, a second special variation winning device 42 is provided at the upper left portion of the center frame 34. The second special variable prize winning device 42 is configured to receive a prize in the second big prize opening of the turning part 42a for opening and closing the second big prize opening, the big prize opening solenoid 28b for turning the turning part 42a, and the game ball. And an upper count switch 606 as a count sensor to detect.
The game ball that has won the second special variation winning device 42 is guided to the back side of the game board through the winning ball channel 44.

The special winning opening solenoid 28 b is fixed to the back surface of the center frame 34. A decorative plate 34e is provided on the front surface of the center frame 34 at the mounting position of the big prize opening solenoid 28b. The decorative plate 34e is a member that hides the special winning opening solenoid 28b. The center frame 34 is almost entirely formed as a transparent member. However, by providing the decorative plate 34e, the large winning opening solenoid 28b can be prevented from being visually recognized from the front, and the appearance is not impaired. By attaching the decorative sticker to the front surface of the decorative plate 34e as transparent,
You may restrict | limit that the big prize opening solenoid 28b is visually recognized from the front.

Below the center frame 34, a stage portion 100 having a rolling surface 101 on which a game ball can roll, and a warp passage 110 that guides the game ball flowing down the game area 31 to the stage portion 100.
And a cover member 120 for restricting a game ball from flowing into the rendering device unit (back surface constituent member) 200. The stage unit 100, the warp passage 110, and the cover member 120 are configured as transparent members.

The warp passage 110 is disposed in the lower left portion of the center frame 34. Warp passage 110
Is a receiving unit 111 that can receive a game ball flowing down the game area 31 on the left side of the center frame 34 and a guide that guides the game ball that has passed through the receiving unit 111 to the left end of the rolling surface 101 of the stage unit 100. Part 112. The receiving portion 111 is opened obliquely upward to the left so that a game ball flowing down the left side of the center frame 34 can be easily received. The guide portion 112 has a path shape with an open rear surface, but the opening of the rear surface is blocked by the cover member 120.

The stage unit 100 is disposed at the lower center of the center frame 34. Stage part 10
0 includes a rolling surface 101 that extends in the left-right direction and on which a game ball can roll. Stage part 10
A cover member 120 is provided behind the zero.

The rolling surface 101 of the stage unit 100 is formed in a wavy shape in which both the left and right ends and the center are raised. A first guide portion 102 that slopes downward toward the rear is provided at the center of the rolling surface 101, and a second slope that slopes downward toward the front on the rolling surface 101 on both the left and right sides of the first guide portion 102. A guide unit 103 is provided.

The cover member 120 includes an upright wall 121 that rises upward from the rear end portion of the rolling surface 101,
It is comprised from the folding | turning wall part 122 turned up toward the front from the upper end of the standing wall part 121 so that the rolling surface 101 may be opposed. The game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 101 by the standing wall portion 121 and the folded wall portion 122 of the cover member 120 is changed to the fluctuation display device 35 (the production device unit 200).
) Side can be prevented.

In addition, since the folded wall 122 is formed so that the tip protrudes forward from the front surface of the stage unit 100, the game ball collides with the obstacle nail or the like in the game area 31 below the stage unit 100. Even if it jumps up, it is bounced back to the game area 31 side by the folding wall portion 122. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has jumped up from the game area 31 from entering the fluctuation display device 35 (direction device unit 200).

The standing wall 121 of the cover member 120 communicates with an opening 121 a formed at a position corresponding to the first guide 102 and an opening 121 a and an outlet 104 that opens at the lower front of the stage unit 100. A passage 121b (see FIG. 6) is formed. The game ball that has flowed into the communication path 121b from the first guide portion 102 through the opening 121a is guided below the rolling surface 101 and discharged from the outlet 104 to the game area 31.

Is the game ball guided from the warp passage 110 to the stage unit 100 rolling on the rolling surface 101 and then discharged from the first guide unit 102 through the communication passage 121b to the game area 31 from the outlet 104? Or from the second guide 103 to the game area 31. Stage unit 100
The second outlet 103 is formed immediately above the first start winning opening 37.
Are shifted to the left and right sides of the first start winning opening 37 (see FIGS. 3 and 6), so that the game balls discharged from the outflow port 104 are discharged from the second guide portion 103. First than sphere
The probability of being guided to the start winning opening 37 increases.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, the center frame 3
A distribution space (distribution space portion) 34f into which game balls rolling on the guide portion 34d of the four flow in is formed, and the first passing gate portion 34g through which the game balls can pass is formed in the distribution space 34f. A (first specific area, lottery gate) and a second passing gate portion 34h (second specific area, fixed gate) are provided. The game balls that have flowed into the distribution space 34f are distributed by the distribution device 90 and pass through the first passage gate portion 34g or the second passage gate portion 34h. The sorting device 90 is
It is a device that switches the flow route of game balls. The front surface of the first passage gate portion 34g is decorated with “variation” characters, and the front surface of the second passage gate portion 34h is decorated with “fixed” characters.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7A, the sorting device 90 includes a fixed base 91 fixed to the back surface of the center frame 34, a rotation motor 92 fixed in the fixed base 91, and a rotation motor 92. And a switching unit 93 that is driven to rotate and switches a flow-down route of the game ball.

The switching unit 93 is a substantially columnar member, and has a protrusion 93a that protrudes in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface. The switching unit 93 is accommodated in the distribution space 34 f of the center frame 34 and is disposed so as to be rotatable with respect to the front surface of the center frame 34.

The rotation motor 92 is attached to the fixed base 91, and the rotation shaft 92 of the rotation motor 92 is used.
A disk portion 96 is fixed to a. At the center of the disc portion 96, a projecting shaft 96a projecting forward.
A shaft portion (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the switching portion 93 is fixed to the projecting shaft 96a. Accordingly, the driving force of the rotary motor 92 is transmitted to the switching unit 93 via the disk unit 96.

The disc portion 96 includes a notch portion 96b penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the initial position of the switching portion 93 is detected by the disc portion 96 having the notch portion 96b and the photosensor 97 disposed in the fixed base 91. The

The photo sensor 97 includes a groove part through which the disk part 96 can pass, and a light emitting part and a light receiving part arranged so as to straddle the groove part. The light emitting part of the photosensor 97 irradiates light (infrared rays) toward the light receiving part. Whether this light is shielded by the disk portion 96, or
It is determined whether the light is transmitted through the notch 96b of the disk portion 96. If the light is transmitted, it is determined that the switching unit 93 is in the initial position. The rotational position of the switching unit 93 can be detected by the number of steps of the rotary motor 92 from the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 7 (B), the first guiding path for guiding the game ball to the first passing gate section 34g in the distribution space 34f by arranging the switching section 93 in the center frame 34. 94,
A second guide path 95 for guiding the game ball to the second passage gate portion 34h is formed.

When the switching unit 93 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise in FIG. 7B by the rotary motor 92, the protrusion 93a of the switching unit 93 closes the upstream portion of the second guide path 95 and flows into the distribution space 34f. The sphere is guided to the first passage gate 34g through the first guide path 94. On the other hand, when the switching unit 93 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 7B by the rotary motor 92, the projection 93a of the switching unit 93 closes the upstream portion of the first guide path 94 and enters the distribution space 34f. The inflowing game ball is guided to the second passage gate portion 34h through the second guide path 95. The game balls that have passed through the first passage gate part 34g and the second passage gate part 34h are discharged to the game area 31 on the right side of the center frame 34 through a discharge passage 98 formed in the lower part of the distribution space 34f.

The first passage gate portion 34g is provided with a first passage detection sensor 607a for detecting that the game ball has passed through the first passage gate portion 34g, and the second passage gate portion 34h is provided with a second game ball. A second passage detection sensor 607b that detects passing through the passage gate portion 34h is provided.

As shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7A, two LEs are provided in the fixed base 91 of the sorting device 90.
D boards 99a and 99c are accommodated.

A plurality of (five) LEDs 99b are provided along the first guide path 94 and the second guide path 95 on the front surface of the LED substrate 99a. By causing the LED 99b to emit light in accordance with the gaming state, a light emission effect is performed such that the first guide path 94 and the second guide path 95 are lit.

The LED substrate 99c is disposed below the LED substrate 99a. On the front surface of the LED board 99c, four LEDs 99d are provided in a horizontal row along the discharge passage 98, and three notification LEDs 99e used for notification effects to be described later are provided in a horizontal row below.

The center frame 34 in front of the notification LED 99e on the LED board 99c has each notification LE.
Lens members 61 to 63 are attached corresponding to D99e. The front surface of the lens member 61 disposed on the left side is decorated with “variation” characters, and the front surface of the lens member 63 disposed on the right side is decorated with “fixed” characters. The center lens member 62 is decorated with a letter “Aim”.

By causing the notification LED 99e of the LED board 99c to emit light according to the gaming state, a notification effect is performed via the lens members 61 to 63 described above. Details of the notification effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 to 105. In addition, the LE of the LED board 99c according to the gaming state
By causing D99d to emit light, a light emission effect is produced such that the discharge passage 98 shines.

In the gaming machine 1, the LED 99b of the LED board 99a and the LED of the LED board 99c
A lens member is not provided in front of 99d, but a lens member may be provided as necessary.

[Director unit]
Next, with reference to FIG.4 and FIG.8, the rendering device unit (back surface constituent member) 200 will be described. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering device unit 200.

The stage device unit 200 is a unit base member 210 fixed to the back surface of the game board 30.
And the rear side production device 300 and the lower production device 220 housed in the unit base member 210.
The upper decoration unit 240 and the lower decoration unit 260 are provided. The upper effect unit 400 and the right effect device 500 are attached to the upper decoration unit 240.

The unit base member 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the unit base member 210.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the unit base member 210 includes a back wall 211 and a back wall 2.
11 is a frame composed of a side wall 212 that rises forward from the outer peripheral edge of 11, and can accommodate various devices.

The game board 32 of the game board 30 of the gaming machine 1 is made of resin, and the board thickness of the game board 32 is thinner than that of a conventional wooden game board. In the gaming machine 1, a spacer member 213 is integrally formed at the front end of the side wall 212 of the unit base member 210 in order to compensate for the reduced thickness of the game board 32 (the spacer member 213 may be attached as a separate member). good). When the unit base member 210 is mounted on the game board 32 and the thickness in the front-rear direction is thin, it is difficult to fix the unit base member 210 by engaging with the front frame 5, but the unit base member 210 has a thickness in the front-rear direction. Since the spacer member 213 is provided, the thickness in the front-rear direction when the unit base member 210 is installed on the game board 32 is the same as that in the prior art, and the front base frame 5 can be engaged (stored appropriately).

The spacer member 213 located at the upper right corner of the unit base member 210 has a notch 213.
a is formed. The notch 213a is necessary for grounding the game board 30 and is disposed at a position corresponding to the charge removal unit 900 (see FIG. 3).

In the gaming machine 1, the spacer member 213 is attached to the side wall 212 of the unit base member 210.
However, the unit base member 210 may be formed at only four corners on the left, right, upper and lower sides. Further, since the spacer member 213 can be visually recognized through the transparent game board 32, a decorative sheet or a decorative seal may be attached to the front surface of the spacer member 213 to enhance the decorativeness.

An upper portion of the rear wall 211 of the unit base member 210 is recessed rearward. A space surrounded by the upper portion of the back wall 211 and the side wall 212 is an upper housing space 214 for housing the back side production device 300 and the upper decoration unit 240, and is a space surrounded by the lower portion of the back wall 211 and the side wall 212. The lower stage production device 220 and the lower decoration unit 2
A lower housing space 215 for housing 60.

4 and 9, a display unit 70 having a variable display device 35 is disposed on the back surface of the upper portion of the unit base member 210, and a game control device is disposed on the back surface of the lower portion of the unit base member 210. A main control unit 80 having 600 is arranged.

A window 216 is formed in the upper portion of the back wall 211 at a position corresponding to the display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35. The display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35 is visible through the window unit 216.

Further, four relay boards that are electrically connected to the game control device 600 and various devices are attached to the back surface of the lower portion of the back wall 211. As shown by the broken lines in FIG. 9, surrounding walls surrounding the four relay boards are formed on the back wall 211. The surrounding wall is a wall member that stands rearward from the back surface of the back wall 211.

The side wall 212 located at the lower part of the unit base member 210 has a lower decorative unit 260.
An opening 217 for allowing a game ball guided through the game board 30 to pass through is formed. In addition, on the curved side wall 212 located on the left side of the unit base member 210, wiring openings 212a and 212b are formed through which the wiring of electrical components disposed on the game board 30 is passed. Details of the electrical component wiring process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The spacer member 213 located in the lower right part of the unit base member 210 is provided with a storage portion 218 for storing the drawer connector board 219, and the drawer connector is placed on the rear wall of the storage portion behind the game board. An opening is formed to allow it to face. A drawer connector board (not shown) is also provided in the lower right portion of the storage portion 5a provided in the inner frame 5,
When the game board 30 is stored in the storage unit 5a, the game board 30 and the drawer connectors of the inner frame 5 are connected to each other. By connecting two drawer connectors, various electrical components on the game board 30 side (
Game control device 600, production control device 700, etc.) and various electrical components on the inner frame 5 side (power supply device 60)
0, the payout control device 640, etc.) can be electrically connected. When a wire harness is used for connecting electrical components, wiring and the like are complicated. However, since the gaming machine 1 uses a drawer connector board, the connection work can be simplified.

[Lower production device]
Next, the lower effect device 220 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the lower effect device 220. FIG. 11A is a rear view of the movable part of the lower effect device 220, and FIG. 11B is a perspective view of the lower effect device 220.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 10, the lower effect device 220 includes a flat fixed base 221,
A cover member 222 attached to the front surface of the fixed base 221, a movable decorative member 223 accommodated in an accommodating space between the fixed base 221 and the cover member 222, and a drive motor that drives the movable decorative member 223 230.

The fixed base 221 is a substantially rectangular plate member, and is fixed to the back wall 211 (see FIG. 9) below the unit base member 210.

The cover member 222 is a lid member attached to the fixed base 221 so as to cover the front surface of the fixed base 221. An accommodation space that can accommodate various members is formed between the cover member 222 and the fixed base 221.

The cover member 222 has a housing recess 222a that houses the decorative body 224 of the movable decorative member 223 when the movable decorative member 223, which will be described later, is at the lower limit position (initial position). The upper surface wall 222b of the cover member 222 is decorated with characters, and the front wall 222c of the cover member 222 is formed with a wiring opening 222d for allowing electric wiring connected to the drive motor 230 and the like to pass therethrough. Yes.

The movable decorative member 223 includes a decorative body 224 and a slide plate 225 fixed to the back surface of the decorative body 224, and is configured to be movable up and down between a lower limit position (initial position) and an upper limit position.

The decorative body 224 is a disk-shaped member, and character decoration is applied to the front surface of the decorative body 224. Note that an LED substrate may be provided inside the decorative body 224, and the decorative body 224 may be caused to emit light using an LED provided on the LED substrate.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11A, the slide plate 225 is a plate-like member extending in the vertical direction. The upper portion of the slide plate 225 is fixed to the back surface of the decorative body 224, and the lower portion of the slide plate 225 is configured to extend downward from the decorative body 224. The slide plate 225 is attached to the guide member 226 fixed to the center of the front surface of the fixed base 221 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The guide member 226 extends in the vertical direction, and the guide member 226 has a U-shaped cross section.

In a state where the slide plate 225 is attached to the guide member 226, the rear end side of the slide plate 225 is inserted into the guide member 226, and the front end side of the slide plate 225 is the guide member 226.
It is exposed without being inserted. A rack gear 225a is formed on the right side of the exposed slide plate 225 in the vertical direction.

The drive motor 230 is a drive source that moves the movable decorative member 223 up and down. Drive motor 2
30 is fixed to the back surface of the cover member 222 so that the output shaft 231 faces rearward. A main drive gear 232 is fixed to the output shaft 231 of the drive motor 230.

The main driving gear 232 meshes with a first driven gear 233 that is rotatably supported by a first shaft 221 a that is formed to protrude from the fixed base 221. The first driven gear 233 meshes with a second driven gear 234 that is rotatably supported by a second shaft 221 b that is formed to protrude from the fixed base 221. The second driven gear 234 meshes with the rack gear 225 a of the slide plate 225 of the movable decorative member 223.

In the lower rendering device 220 configured as described above, the movable decorative member 2 is selected according to the gaming state.
23 is controlled to move up and down between the lower limit position and the upper limit position.

As shown in FIG. 8, when the effect by the lower effect device 220 is not executed, the drive motor 230 is stopped and the movable decorative member 223 is located at the lower limit position. When the movable decorative member 223 is in the lower limit position in this way, the decorative body 224 has the cover member 120 (
It is located behind (refer to FIG. 3) and is in a state where it is difficult to be visually recognized.

Note that a substantially U-shaped photo sensor 235 is disposed on the fixed base 221, and when the movable decorative member 223 is at the lower limit position, the lower end of the slide plate 225 of the movable decorative member 223 is the concave portion of the photo sensor 235. The light emitted from the photosensor 235 is shielded. Therefore, it is possible to detect whether or not the movable decorative member 223 is at the lower limit position (initial position) by detecting whether the photosensor 235 is in a light-transmitting state or a light-blocking state.

When the game progresses in the gaming machine 1 and enters a predetermined gaming state, the drive motor 230
Is driven to rotate forward, and the driving force of the drive motor 230 is transmitted to the slide plate 225 via the gears 233, 234 and 235. As a result, the slide plate 225 is shown in FIG.
Rises, and the movable decorative member 223 rises to the upper limit position. Thus, the movable decorative member 223
Is raised to the upper limit position, the entire decorative body 224 becomes visible to the player.

Thereafter, the drive motor 230 is driven in reverse and the slide plate 225 is lowered, whereby the movable decorative member 223 returns from the upper limit position to the initial position. In addition, the vibration effect which vibrates the movable decoration member 223 up and down can also be performed by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive motor 230 alternately.

[Back side production device]
Next, the back side production device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG.
2 is an exploded perspective view of the back side production apparatus 300. FIG. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the left shutter unit 330 of the back side rendering device 300. FIG. FIG. 14 shows the left shutter unit 330.
It is a figure explaining the rotation operation | movement of this rotation door 340. FIG. FIG. 15 shows the left shutter unit 33.
It is a figure explaining 0 slide operation | movement.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 12, the back side production device 300 includes a frame-shaped base frame 310, a cover frame 320 attached to the front side of the base frame 310, the base frame 310, and the cover frame 3.
A pair of shutter units 3 disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to 20
30 and a drive unit 360 for driving these shutter units 330.

The base frame 310 is a flat frame, and the back wall 211 of the unit base member 210.
Fixed to the top of the. The base frame 310 includes an opening 311 that allows the display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35 to be visible at a position corresponding to the window 216 of the unit base member 210.

The cover frame 320 is a frame formed corresponding to the shape of the base frame 310 and is fixed to the base frame 310 so as to cover the front surface of the base frame 310. The cover frame 320 is located at a position corresponding to the window portion 216 of the unit base member 210, and the display portion 35a of the variation display device 35.
Is provided.

As shown in FIG. 12, a pair of shutter units 330 is provided between the base frame 310 and the cover frame 320. These shutter units 330 are configured to slide in the left-right direction between a position (initial position) on the side of the display section 35a of the variable display device 35 and a position (center position) in front of the display section 35a. Has been. Accordingly, the space in which the shutter unit 330 is accommodated is set to the side of the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 and is set in front of the display unit 35a. It is divided into an effect area that operates.

Further, between the upper part of the base frame 310 and the upper part of the cover frame 320, the shutter unit 3 is provided.
An arrangement space for arranging a drive unit 360 for driving 30 is formed. This arrangement space communicates with a space (standby area and effect area) in which the shutter unit 330 is accommodated.

The pair of shutter units 330 are disposed apart from each other in the left-right direction. The left shutter unit 330 and the right shutter unit 330 are configured to be symmetrical. Since these shutter units 330 are members having the same function, the configuration of the left shutter unit 330 will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration of the right shutter unit 330 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 13, the left shutter unit 330 includes a slide member 331, a decoration member 334 attached to the front surface of the slide member 331, and a rotation provided to be rotatable with respect to the slide member 331 and the decoration member 334. A door 340 and a drive motor 350 that rotationally drives the rotary door 340 are provided.

The slide member 331 is a substantially U-shaped member when viewed from the front, and the drive motor 35 is provided at the upper front portion.
An accommodation recess 331a for accommodating 0 is provided.

At the upper end surface of the slide member 331, an attachment portion 332 is formed that is slidably attached to a guide rod 322 (see FIGS. 12 and 15) that is horizontally fixed to the upper part of the back surface of the cover frame 320. A bearing hole 332a is formed through the mounting portion 332 in the left-right direction, and the guide rod 322 is inserted into the bearing hole 332a of the mounting portion 332.

On the upper end surface of the block-shaped attachment portion 332, an endless belt 3 of a drive unit 360 described later is provided.
A belt fixing portion 333 fixed to 75 is formed. A through hole 333a is formed in the belt fixing portion 333 in the left-right direction, and the belt fixing portion 333 is attached to the endless belt 375 through the through hole 333a.

The decorative member 334 is a member provided so as to cover the front surface of the slide member 331, and the front surface of the decorative member 334 is decorated such as plating. In a state where the decorative member 334 is installed on the slide member 331, the drive motor 350 is concealed by the decorative member 334.

The upper part of the slide member 331 and the decorative member 334 is formed as an upper protruding part 330a (see FIG. 12) that protrudes toward the other shutter unit 330, and the lower part of the slide member 331 and the decorative member 334 is the other part. It is formed as a lower protruding portion 330b (see FIG. 12) protruding toward the shutter unit 330 side. When the left and right shutter units 330 have moved to the center position, the upper and lower protrusions 330a and 330b of the left shutter unit 330 and the upper and lower protrusions 330a and 330b of the right shutter unit 330 are displayed. And face each other with a minute gap.

The rotating door 340 is a movable member that rotates with respect to the slide member 331 and the decorative member 334. The pivot door 340 includes a first base 341 and a second base fixed to the back side of the first base 341.
L disposed in the accommodation space between the base 342 and the first base 341 and the second base 342.
An ED substrate 343.

The first base 341 is a substantially rectangular light-transmitting member, and has a character decoration on the surface (see FIG. 14A). On the upper right end surface of the first base 341, an upper rotation shaft 34 protruding upward is provided.
1a is formed, and a lower rotation shaft 34 projecting downward is formed on the lower right end surface of the first base 341.
1b is formed.

The second base 342 fixed to the back surface of the first base 341 is a substantially rectangular light-transmitting member, and has a decorative surface on the surface (see FIG. 14B). A pair of upper and lower magnetic bodies are accommodated at a position on the front surface of the second base 342 and closer to the side of the first base 341 opposite to the side on which the upper rotation shaft 341a and the lower rotation shaft 341b are provided. A portion 342a is formed.
The magnetic body 344 is accommodated in these magnetic body accommodating parts 342a.

The LED substrate 343 is fixed to the back surface of the first base 341 in the accommodation space between the first base 341 and the second base 342. The LED board 343 includes a plurality of LEDs 343a.
And these LEDs 343a are arranged on the first base 341 so as to face sideways. The LED 343a is a common light source that causes the front surface and the back surface (the first base 341 and the second base 342) of the rotating door 340 to emit light simultaneously. Thus, by simultaneously emitting light on the front surface and the back surface of the revolving door 340, a light emission effect using the entire revolving door 340 becomes possible.
The production effect can be enhanced. Further, the number of parts is reduced as compared with the case where LEDs for causing the front and back surfaces of the rotary door 340 to emit light are provided separately.

The pivot door 340 includes an upper pivot shaft 341 a and a lower pivot shaft 341 b that are inserted into a pair of bearing holes 334 a formed in the upper and lower portions of the decorative member 334, respectively. It is possible to rotate with respect to. The upper pivot shaft 3 of the pivot door 340
41 a is coupled to the output shaft of the drive motor 350 via a coupling member 351.

As shown in FIG. 14A, when the rotation effect by the rotation door 340 is not executed, the drive motor 350 is stopped, and the surface of the first base 341 becomes the front surface of the rotation door 340. The character decoration applied to the surface of the first base 341 becomes visible. On the other hand, when the rotation effect by the rotation door 340 is executed, the drive motor 350 is driven, and FIG.
B), the surface of the second base 342 becomes the front surface of the pivot door 340, and the second base 34
Character decorations on the surface of 2 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 15, the drive unit 360 that drives the pair of shutter units 330 is accommodated in the arrangement space between the upper part of the base frame 310 and the upper part of the cover frame 320. The drive unit 360 is a left drive mechanism 3 that drives the left shutter unit 330.
70 and a right drive mechanism 380 that drives the right shutter unit 330.

The left drive mechanism 370 includes a drive motor 371 that is fixed to the upper rear surface of the cover frame 320 so that the output shaft faces rearward, a main pulley 372 that is fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 371,
Two driven pulleys 373 and 374 disposed on the left and right sides of the main pulley 372, and an endless belt 375 wound around the pulleys 372, 373, and 374 are provided.

The driven pulley 373 is provided on the left side of the drive motor 371 and is pivotally supported via fixed shafts 361 whose ends are fixed to the base frame 310 and the cover frame 320, respectively. The driven pulley 374 is provided on the right side of the drive motor 371 and has a base frame 310.
The cover frame 320 is pivotally supported via a fixed shaft 362 whose end is fixed.

A belt fixing portion 333 of the left shutter unit 330 is fixed to an endless belt 375 located between the driven pulleys 373 and 374.

On the other hand, the right drive mechanism 380 includes a drive motor 381 that is fixed to the upper front portion of the base frame 310 so that the output shaft faces forward, and a main driving pulley 38 that is fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 381.
2, two driven pulleys 383 and 384 disposed on the left and right sides of the main pulley 382, and an endless belt 385 wound around the pulleys 382, 383, and 384.

The driven pulley 383 is provided on the left side of the drive motor 381, and the left drive mechanism 37.
It is supported via a fixed shaft 362 that supports a zero driven pulley 374. Thus, the fixed shaft 362 is a common shaft that supports both the driven pulleys 374 and 383. Also,
The driven pulley 384 is provided on the right side of the drive motor 381, and is pivotally supported via a fixed shaft 363 whose ends are fixed to the base frame 310 and the cover frame 320.

A belt fixing portion 333 of the right shutter unit 330 is fixed to an endless belt 385 positioned between the driven pulleys 383 and 384.

When the production by the back side production apparatus 300 is not executed, the drive motors 371 and 381 of the drive unit 360 are stopped, and the left and right shutter units 330 are located at the initial position (standby position) in the standby area. Yes. Thus, when the shutter unit 330 is in the initial position, the shutter unit 330 is located behind the upper decoration unit 240 (see FIG. 8), and almost the entire shutter unit 330 is hardly visible. Yes. Since the upper decoration unit 240 is disposed in front of the shutter unit 330, the rotation effect by the rotation door 340 is impossible in the shutter unit 330 stopped in the standby area. That is, the standby area is set to a width (front / rear width) in which the pivot door 340 of the shutter unit 330 is not pivotable.

Note that a substantially U-shaped photosensor 335 (see FIG. 12) is disposed on the left side of the cover frame 320, and when the left shutter unit 330 is in the initial position, the slide member 331 of the shutter unit 330 has The light shielding plate 331b (see FIG. 15) formed on the left end surface is
The light emitted from the photosensor 335 is shielded by being inserted into the recess of the photosensor 335. Therefore, it is possible to detect whether the left shutter unit 330 is in the initial position by detecting whether the photosensor 335 is in a light-transmitting state or a light-blocking state.

A substantially U-shaped photo sensor 336 (see FIG. 12) is disposed on the right side of the cover frame 320, and when the right shutter unit 330 is in the initial position, the slide member 331 of the shutter unit 330 has A light shielding plate 331b (see FIG. 12) formed on the right end surface,
The light emitted from the photosensor 336 is shielded by being inserted into the recess of the photosensor 336. Therefore, it is possible to detect whether the right shutter unit 330 is in the initial position by detecting whether the photosensor 336 is in a light-transmitting state or a light-blocking state.

When the game progresses in the gaming machine 1 and enters a predetermined gaming state, the drive unit 36
The zero drive motor 371 is driven in reverse, and the endless belt 375 rotates so that the left shutter unit 330 moves rightward from the initial position. At this time, the drive motor 381 of the drive unit 360 is rotated forward, and the endless belt 385 rotates so that the right shutter unit 330 moves to the left from the initial position. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 15, the left and right shutter units 330 slide along the guide rods 322 from the standby area to the effect area in front of the display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35.

Note that a protruding piece 331 c is formed to project downward on the lower end surface of the slide member 331 of each shutter unit 330, and each protruding piece 331 c is formed between the lower part of the base frame 310 and the lower part of the cover frame 320. A guide groove (not shown) is slidably inserted. Since the upper part of the shutter unit 330 is guided along the guide rod 322 via the mounting portion 332, and the lower part of the shutter unit 330 is guided along the guide groove via the protruding piece 331c, the shutter unit 330 slides smoothly. Can be moved.

When the shutter unit 330 moves from the initial position in the standby area to the center position in the effect area, almost the entire shutter unit 330 can be visually recognized by the player. In the effect area, a member that prevents the rotating operation of the rotating door 340 is not provided in front of the shutter unit 330, and the rotating operation of the rotating door 340 is possible. That is, the effect area is set to a width (front / rear width) in which the rotating door 340 of the shutter unit 330 can rotate.

In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the left and right shutter units 330 are slid from the initial position in the standby area to the center position in the effect area, and then the rotating door 340 of each shutter unit 330 is rotated. By controlling the rendering operation in this way, it is possible to efficiently use the space such as the standby area and the rendering area around the variable display device 35, and to enhance the rendering effect by the back side rendering device 300.

Further, the shutter unit 330 is configured to slide in the left-right direction in the effect area from the standby area, and the pivot door 340 provided in the shutter unit 330 is rotated using the space in the front-rear direction of the effect area. Thus, different rendering operations can be realized in one back side production device 300, and the production effect of the back side production device 300 can be further enhanced. In addition, space saving around the standby area can be achieved.

Since the upper decorative unit 240 is disposed in front of the standby area of the shutter unit 330, the decorativeness around the standby area can be improved. In this embodiment, the upper decoration unit 240 is disposed in front of the shutter unit 330 in the standby area. However, the upper decoration unit 240 is disposed behind the shutter unit 330 in the standby area (the back surface portion of the standby area). A decorative member such as 240 may be provided. In this case, when the shutter unit 330 moves from the standby area, the decorative member is visible.

In the rear rendering device 300, an arrangement space for arranging the drive unit 360 is formed between the upper part of the base frame 310 and the upper part of the cover frame 320, and the shutter unit 330 operates in this arrangement space. It is comprised so that it may communicate with the space (standby area | region and production area) to do. When the drive unit 360 is driven, the air in the installation space of the drive unit 360 and the shutter unit 3 are moved by the movement of the endless belts 375 and 385 and the shutter units 330.
The drive motor 3 constituting the drive unit 360 is agitated with the air in the space in which 30 operates.
Heat generation of 71 and 381 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress failure or malfunction of electrical drive sources such as the drive motors 371 and 381.

[Lower decoration unit]
Next, the lower decoration unit 260 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 16 to 20.

FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the lower decoration unit 260. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the intermediate member 290 constituting the lower decoration unit 260. FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the decorative member 270 attached to the intermediate member 290. FIG. 19A is an enlarged front view of a part of the lower decorative unit 260, and FIG. 19B is a longitudinal sectional view of the lower decorative unit 260 along the BB plane of FIG. 19A. FIG. 20 shows the flow path component member 2 constituting the lower decorative unit 260.
FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, the lower decoration unit 260 is accommodated in the lower accommodation space 215 of the unit base member 210 in a state of being disposed in front of the lower effect device 220. The lower decoration unit 260 functions as a member that decorates the lower portion of the game area 31 and also functions as a member that guides a game ball that has won a prize opening or the like to the ball collection port 5c (see FIG. 2) of the front frame 5. The game balls collected from the ball collection port 5c of the front frame 5 are guided to the outside of the gaming machine 1 through a guide path (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 16, the lower decoration unit 260 is disposed on the flow path component 280, the intermediate member 290 disposed on the front surface of the flow path component member 280, and the front surface of the intermediate member 290. A decorative member 270 disposed to cover the LED substrate 261 and the front surface of the intermediate member 290.
And comprising.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the intermediate member 290 is a substantially rectangular plate member. The intermediate member 290 guides the game balls won in the first special variation winning device 41 and the first guide rod 291 that guides the game balls won in the first start prize opening 37 and the second start prize opening 38. Guide rod 2
92, and a guide path 293 for guiding the game ball won in the general winning opening 40.

The first guide rod 291 is formed at the center of the intermediate member 290 corresponding to the first start winning opening 37 and the second starting winning opening 38 provided in the game area 31 (see FIG. 3). The first guide rod 291 is a game ball rolling path extending in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to penetrate the intermediate member 290 in the front-rear direction. The first guide rod 291 guides the game ball won in the first start winning opening 37 and the second start winning opening 38 from the front to the rear of the intermediate member 290.

The second guide rod 292 is formed on the right side of the first guide rod 291 corresponding to the first special variation winning device 41 provided in the game area 31. The second guide rod 292 is a game ball rolling path extending in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to penetrate the intermediate member 290 in the front-rear direction. The second guide rod 292 guides the game ball won in the first special variation winning device 41 from the front to the rear of the intermediate member 290.

The guide path 293 is formed corresponding to each of the four general winning ports 40 provided in the game area 31. Three guide paths 293 are provided on the left side of the first guide bar 291, and one guide path 293 is provided on the right side of the second guide bar 292. The guide path 293 is a game ball rolling path extending in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to penetrate the intermediate member 290 in the front-rear direction. The guide path 293 guides the game ball won in the general winning opening 40 from the front to the rear of the intermediate member 290.

Further, the intermediate member 290 has three attachment holes 294 (see FIG. 16) for attaching the magnetic sensor 23. The attachment holes 294 pass through the intermediate member 290 in the front-rear direction, and the three attachment holes 294 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. The magnetic sensor 23 is inserted into the attachment hole 294 from the back side of the intermediate member 290 and fixed to the intermediate member 290. In a state of being fixed to the intermediate member 290, the tip portion of the magnetic sensor 23 is in contact with the intermediate member 29.
Projects forward of zero.

The LED substrate 261 is fixed to the front surface of the intermediate member 290. The LED board 261 includes a plurality of LEDs 261a that emit light toward the front, and a first guide rod 2 of the intermediate member 290.
91, five openings 261b through which the second guide rod 292 and guide path 293 pass, and three passage holes 261c through which the magnetic sensor 23 passes are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, the decorative member 270 is a light transmitting member having a substantially rectangular plate shape,
Various decorations such as character decorations are provided on the front surface of the decorative member 270. The decorative member 270 is L
It is attached to the intermediate member 290 so as to cover the ED substrate 261. Lower decoration unit 260
In the state in which the gaming machine 1 is provided, the decorative member 270 of the lower decorative unit 260 is located behind the cover member 120 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), and the upper half of the decorative member 270 is a transparent cover member. 120 and the game board 32 are visible.

The decorative member 270 includes a collar housing portion 271 that houses the first guide collar 291 of the intermediate member 290,
A through hole 272 that allows the second guide rod 292 to pass therethrough, and a through hole 273 that allows the guide path 293 to pass therethrough.
And comprising.

The heel housing portion 271 is formed in the central portion of the decorative member 270. In a state where the decorative member 270 is installed on the intermediate member 290, the first guide rod 2 of the intermediate member 290 is placed in the rod housing portion 271.
91 is accommodated. A through hole 271a is formed on the front side wall of the basket housing portion 271 to receive the game balls won in the first start winning port 37 and the second start winning port 38 into the bag housing portion 271.

In addition, when the decorative member 270 is installed on the intermediate member 290, the second of the intermediate member 290 is
The guide rod 292 protrudes in front of the decorative member 270 through the through hole 272, and each guide path 293 of the intermediate member 290 protrudes in front of the decorative member 270 through the through hole 273.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, the decorative member 270 described above further includes a magnetic sensor housing portion 274 that houses the magnetic sensor 23 and a radio wave sensor housing portion 276 that houses the radio wave sensor 24.

The radio wave sensor housing 276 is provided in the lower left portion of the decorative member 270. Radio wave sensor 2
4 is mounted in the radio wave sensor housing 276.

The magnetic sensor housing portion 274 is disposed corresponding to the three magnetic sensors 23 fixed to the intermediate member 290. The three magnetic sensor accommodating portions 274 are provided on the front upper portion of the decorative member 270 at a position where the player can visually recognize the game plate 32 through the game board 32.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and has an insertion hole 274a into which the tip portion of the magnetic sensor 23 is inserted. .
Therefore, when the decoration member 270 is installed on the intermediate member 290, the tip portion of the magnetic sensor 23 fixed to the intermediate member 290 is inserted into the insertion hole 27 of the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 of the decoration member 270.
4a is inserted. The magnetic sensor 23 housed in the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 detects magnetism within a predetermined range around the game area 31 where the magnetic sensor 23 is disposed.

As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 18, the upper part of the front surface of the decorative member 270 has the same outer shape as the outer shape of the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 at a position that can be visually recognized by the player through the game board 32. Two dummy accommodating portions 275 are provided. The dummy housing portion 275 is disposed at a position outside the magnetic detection range (or within the magnetic detection range) of the magnetic sensor 23 housed in the magnetic sensor housing portion 274. By providing the dummy accommodating portion 275 on the decorative member 270 as described above, it is possible to increase the deterrence against magnetic fraud without increasing the number of the magnetic sensors 23.

The decorative member 270 has two dummy housing portions 275, but the dummy housing portion 27
The number of 5 is arbitrarily determined as necessary.

In the lower decoration unit 260 configured as described above, the game balls won in the first start winning opening 37 and the second starting winning opening 38 are intermediate members from the front of the decoration member 270 through the through hole 271a and the first guide rod 291. The game ball guided to the rear of 290 and having won the first special variation winning device 41 is guided from the front of the decorative member 270 to the rear of the intermediate member 290 through the second guide rod 292. In addition, the game balls won in each general winning opening 40 are guided from the front of the decorative member 270 to the rear of the intermediate member 290 through the respective guide paths 293. Thus, the game ball guided to the rear of the intermediate member 290 flows into various channels on the front side of the channel component 280.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 20, the flow path component member 280 is fixed to the back surface of the intermediate member 290, and a frame that forms various flow paths between the back surface of the intermediate member 290 and the front surface of the flow path component member 280. Is the body.

The flow path component 280 includes a start winning port channel 281 that guides the game ball flowing in from the first guide rod 291 downward, and a first big prize port that guides the game ball flowing in from the second guide rod 292 downward. A general winning port 283 that guides the game balls flowing in from the left three guiding paths 293 downward, and a general winning port that guides the gaming balls flowing in from the one guiding path 293 on the right. A flow path 284, a second large winning opening flow path 285 for guiding a game ball won in the second special variation winning device 42 downward, and a combined flow path 2 where the game balls flowing down from these flow paths 281 to 285 merge.
86.

The start winning opening channel 281 is formed at the center of the front surface of the channel component 280. The upstream portion of the start winning port channel 281 communicates with the first guide rod 291, and the downstream portion of the start winning port channel 281 communicates with the combined channel 286. The game ball that has flowed in from the first guide rod 291 passes through the start winning opening channel 28.
1 flows down and is guided to the combined flow path 286.

The first big winning opening channel 282 is formed in the flow path component 280 on the right side of the starting winning port channel 281. The upstream portion of the first big winning opening channel 282 communicates with the second guide rod 292, and the downstream portion of the first big winning port channel 282 communicates with the combined flow channel 286. The game ball that has flowed in from the second guide rod 292 flows down the first big prize opening channel 282 and is guided to the combined channel 286.

The general winning opening channel 283 is formed in the flow path component 280 on the left side of the starting winning port channel 281. The upstream portion of the general winning opening channel 283 is branched into three channels, and these three channels communicate with each of the three guide channels 293. The downstream portion of the general prize opening channel 283 is one channel in which the three upstream channels gather, and communicates with the combined channel 286. The game balls that have flowed in from the three left guide passages 293 flow down the general winning opening channel 283, and the combined channel 28
6 leads. A winning port switch 604 a for detecting that a game ball has won the general winning port 40 is provided at the outlet of the general winning port channel 283.

The general winning opening channel 284 is formed in the flow path component 280 on the right side of the first large winning port channel 282. The upstream portion of the general winning opening channel 284 communicates with the right guide passage 293, and the downstream portion of the general winning opening channel 284 communicates with the combined flow channel 286. The game ball that has flowed in from the right guide path 293 flows down the general winning opening channel 284 and is guided to the combined channel 286. General prize opening channel 284
At the exit of the game, a winning opening switch 604 for detecting that a game ball has won the general winning opening 40 is displayed.
b is provided.

The second big winning opening channel 285 is formed in the channel constituting member 280 on the left side of the general winning port channel 283. The upstream portion of the second large winning opening channel 285 communicates with the downstream end of the winning ball channel 44 (see FIGS. 6 and 21) through which the game balls won in the second special variable winning device 42 flow down, The downstream portion of the winning opening channel 285 communicates with the combined channel 286. The game balls that have flowed in from the winning ball channel 44 flow down the second large winning port channel 285 and are guided to the combined channel 286.

The combined flow path 286 is provided in the lower part of the front surface of the flow path constituting member 280 and is formed to roll inflowing game balls forward of the gaming machine 1. The game balls that have rolled in the combined flow path 286 are passed through the openings 217 formed in the unit base member 210, and the ball collection port 5c (FIG. 2) of the front frame 5.
To the outside of the gaming machine 1 through a guideway (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 20, the flow path component 280 has wiring openings 287 for leading the electrical wiring of various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 23 to the outside.

In the lower decoration unit 260 described above, the magnetic sensor 23 is fixed to the intermediate member 290, and the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 for housing the magnetic sensor 23 is provided in the decoration member 270. You may arrange | position between the board | plates 32. FIG. Further, the radio wave sensor 24 may be disposed between the decorative member 270 and the game board 32 instead of being disposed in the radio wave sensor housing portion 276 of the decorative member 270.

[Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 240 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG.
FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit 240.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 21, the upper decoration unit 240 is accommodated in the upper accommodation space 214 of the unit base member 210 in a state of being disposed in front of the back side production device 300.

The upper decoration unit 240 includes a left decoration portion 241 that extends in the vertical direction along the left edge of the display portion 35a of the variable display device 35, and a right decoration portion that extends in the vertical direction along the right edge of the display portion 35a. 242 and an upper decoration portion 243 extending in the left-right direction along the upper edge of the display portion 35a. The upper decoration unit 240 is configured in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 21, the left decoration portion 241 includes the left game area 3 including the usual start gate 36.
1 (see FIG. 3). A winning ball flow path 44 through which a game ball won in the second special variation winning device 42 flows down is attached to the back surface of the left decorative portion 241.

The winning ball flow path 44 includes an upstream flow path 44a that guides the game balls won in the second special variation winning device 42 in the left-right direction, and a downstream flow that is connected to the upstream flow path 44a and guides the game balls downward. Road 4
4b.

The downstream flow path 44b of the winning ball flow path 44 is fixed to the back surface of the left decorative portion 241, and the downstream flow path 4
The upstream channel 44 a connected to the upper part of 4 b extends to the right side of the left decorative part 241 through the notch 241 a of the left decorative part 241. The upstream flow path 44a is disposed along the lower surface of the upper decorative portion 243, and the upstream end of the upstream flow path 44a is connected to the winning ball flow path 44 provided in the center frame (front surface component) 34, and the second A game ball that has won a prize at the second grand prize opening of the special variable prize winning device 42 flows in. Further, the downstream end of the downstream flow path 44b of the winning ball flow path 44 is connected to the upstream portion of the second large winning opening channel 285 (see FIG. 20) of the lower decoration unit 260 described above.

A magnetic sensor housing portion 241b for housing the magnetic sensor 23 is formed in the left decorative portion 241 located behind the usual start gate 36. The magnetism around the usual start gate 36 (see FIG. 31) is detected by the magnetic sensor 23 housed in the magnetic sensor housing portion 241b. On the other hand, the big winning opening solenoid 28b (FIG. 32) of the second special variable winning device 42.
The upper decorative portion 243 near the position where the reference is disposed is provided with a dummy accommodating portion 243b having the same outer shape as the magnetic sensor accommodating portion 241b. The dummy accommodating portion 243b is disposed at a position outside the magnetic detection range (or within the magnetic detection range) of the magnetic sensor 23 accommodated in the magnetic sensor accommodating portion 241b. If a magnetic sensor is arranged around the big prize opening solenoid 28b, the magnetic sensor detects the magnetic force when the solenoid is driven, and there is a possibility of misjudging the magnetism. Therefore, in the vicinity of the big prize opening solenoid 28b, not the magnetic sensor housing portion for housing the magnetic sensor but the dummy housing portion 243b is arranged to prevent magnetic fraud with respect to the second special variable winning device 42. Note that a magnetic sensor whose detection accuracy is lowered to the extent that the magnetic force from the special prize opening solenoid 28b is not detected may be disposed in the vicinity of the special prize opening solenoid 28b.

The left decorative portion 241, the right decorative portion 242, and the upper decorative portion 243 are translucent members, and one LED substrate 244 is fixed to the back surfaces of these decorative portions 241, 242, and 243. LED
A plurality of LEDs 244 a that irradiate light to the left decorative portion 241, the right decorative portion 242 and the upper decorative portion 243 are provided on the front surface of the substrate 244.

In addition, an attachment recess 24 for attaching the upper effect device 400 to the front surface of the upper decoration portion 243.
3a is formed, and an attachment recess 242a for attaching the right effect device 500 is formed on the front surface of the right decorative portion 242.

In a state where the top effect device 400 is installed in the mounting recess 243a of the upper decoration portion 243, the upper effect device 400 is in the opening (display window portion) 34a of the center frame 34,
It is located above the display part 35a of the variable display device 35 (see FIG. 3). Further, in a state where the right portion rendering device 500 is installed in the mounting recess 242a of the right decorative portion 242, the right portion rendering device 500 is in the opening (display window portion) 34a of the center frame 34 and is displayed in a variable manner. It is located on the right side of the display unit 35a of the device 35 (see FIG. 3).

[Upper production device]
Next, the upper effect device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the upper effect device 400. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the light guide plate 470 constituting the movable display unit 450 of the upper effect device 400. FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the upper effect device 400. FIG. 25A shows the movable display unit 450 of the upper effect device 400.
4 is a perspective view of a drive mechanism 440. FIG. FIG. 25B is a rear view of the top effect device 400 with the fixed base 420 removed.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the top effect device 400 is provided with the mounting recess 2 of the upper decoration portion 243.
The upper fixed unit 410 is fixed to 43a, and the movable display unit 450 is disposed on the front surface of the upper fixed unit 410 so as to be movable up and down.

22 to 24, the movable display unit 450 includes a mounting base 460 to which various members are mounted, a light guide plate 470 disposed in front of the mounting base 460, and a light guide plate 47.
A display 480 as a sub display device disposed in front of 0 and a cover member 490 attached to the attachment base 460 so as to surround various members.

The mounting base 460 is a flat plate-like member, and a wall portion 461 standing up front is formed on the upper and lower portions of the front surface of the mounting base 460. The pair of upper and lower wall portions 461 extend in the left-right direction, and are disposed so that the lower surface of the upper wall portion 461 and the upper surface of the lower wall portion 461 face each other. An engaging groove 461a in which the upper part of the light guide plate 470 can engage with the lower surface of the upper wall portion 461.
Is formed in the left-right direction, and an engaging groove 461a with which the lower end of the light guide plate 470 can be engaged is formed in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the lower wall portion 461. The light guide plate 470 is supported by the upper and lower wall portions 461 by engaging with the engagement grooves 461a.

The light guide plate 470 is a translucent plate member, and a pattern groove in the shape of a letter “Let's have a big chance!” Is formed inside the light guide plate 470. The light guide plate 470 is configured so that the pattern groove is lit and displayed when receiving light from the LEDs 462a of the LED substrate 462 disposed on the left and right sides of the light guide plate 470.

The two LED boards 462 are arranged on the front surface of the mounting base 460 so as to be separated in the left-right direction. A pair of left and right substrate support portions 463 are formed on the attachment base 460, and the LED substrates 462 are attached to the left and right substrate support portions 463, respectively. Left substrate support 463
The LED 462a of the LED board 462 supported by the LED board 462 is arranged rightward so as to irradiate the left end surface of the light guide plate 470, and the LE of the LED board 462 supported by the right board support part 463.
D462a is arranged leftward so as to irradiate the right end surface of the light guide plate 470 with light.

Four LEDs 462a are arranged in a line on the left LED board 462, and three LEDs 462a are arranged in a line on the right LED board 462. Each LED 462a on the left LED board 462 and each LED 4 on the right LED board 462
62a is vertically shifted so that the position in the vertical direction is different. By adopting such an LED arrangement, the light guide plate 470 can be uniformly illuminated as a whole.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, the display 480 is a rectangular EL display, and is a transmissive display device in which a light guide plate 470 disposed behind can be visually recognized in a non-display state.
The indicator 480 is attached in the cover member 490. By attaching the cover member 490 provided with the indicator 480 to the attachment base 460, the indicator 480 is positioned in front of the light guide plate 470.

The cover member 490 is a translucent frame member, and a window portion 491 that allows the display 480 to be visually recognized is formed in the front surface of the cover member 490.

Referring to FIGS. 22, 24, and 25 </ b> A, the upper fixing unit 41 of the upper effect device 400 is used.
0 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 22, 24, and 25 </ b> A, the upper fixing unit 410 includes the fixing base 4.
20, a decorative cover member 430 attached to the front surface of the fixed base 420, and a drive mechanism 440 that is disposed in a housing space between the fixed base 420 and the decorative cover member 430 and drives the movable display unit 450.

The fixed base 420 is a flat plate-like member, and is fixed to the mounting recess 243 a of the upper decorative portion 243. An attachment portion 421 for attaching the drive motor 441 of the drive mechanism 440 is formed on the front surface of the fixed base 420.

The decorative cover member 430 is a cover member that surrounds the drive mechanism 440 and is fixed to the fixed base 420. Character decorations “Land”, “Sea”, and “Sky” are provided on the front surface of the decoration cover member 430, and the three character decorations are arranged in a line in the left-right direction. When the movable display unit 450 is positioned in front of the upper fixed unit 410, these character decorations are hidden by the movable display unit 450 and cannot be visually recognized.
When is lowered, it becomes visible.

The drive mechanism 440 includes a drive motor 441 as a drive source, a disk-shaped cam link 442 that is fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 441, and a slider 443 that is linked to the cam link 442.
And comprising.

The slider 443 is a flat plate-like member that extends in the left-right direction. The slider 443 is
A long hole 443 that penetrates the slider 443 in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction.
a. The link pin 442a of the cam link 442 is slidably inserted into the long hole 443a of the slider 443. The link pin 442 a is fixed to the front surface of the cam link 442 at a position offset from the rotation center of the cam link 442.

Connection pins 443b projecting forward are provided at the left and right ends of the slider 443, and a guide groove 431 is formed in the decorative cover member 430 to allow the connection pin 443b of the slider 443 to pass in the front-rear direction. The two guide grooves 431 extend slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction, and are arranged in parallel while being separated in the horizontal direction. In a state where the slider 443 is disposed on the decorative cover member 430, the connecting pin 443 b of the slider 443 protrudes forward of the decorative cover member 430 through the guide groove 431. Connecting pin 4
The mounting base 460 of the movable display unit 450 is fixed to the protruding portion 43b. In this way, the movable display unit 450 is supported via the connecting pin 443b of the slider 443.

The decorative cover member 430 between the two guide grooves 431 has a slider 44.
3 is provided with a central guide groove 432 into which a guide pin 464 (see FIGS. 25A and 25B) protruding from the front surface of 3 is slidably inserted. The central guide groove 432 is formed in parallel with the guide groove 431.

As shown in FIG. 25B, when the effect by the upper effect device 400 is not executed,
The drive motor 441 of the drive mechanism 440 is stopped, and the link pin 44 of the cam link 442 is stopped.
2a is located at the uppermost position. At this time, the movable display unit 450 supported by the connecting pin 443 b of the slider 443 is stopped at the front position (initial position) of the upper fixed unit 410. When the movable display unit 450 is stopped at the initial position, the character decoration of the decorative cover member 430 of the upper fixed unit 410 is invisible.

When the game progresses in the gaming machine 1 and enters a predetermined gaming state, the drive motor 441 of the drive mechanism 440 is driven to rotate forward, and the link pin 442a of the cam link 442 turns clockwise in FIG. 25B. . When the link pin 442a turns and descends from the uppermost position while sliding in the long hole 443a of the slider 443, the slider 443 also descends according to the position of the link pin 442a. As a result, the movable display unit 450 supported by the connecting pin 443 b of the slider 443 is lowered with respect to the upper fixed unit 410. At this time, the guide pin 464 of the mounting base 460 of the movable display unit 450 moves downward along the central guide groove 432 of the decorative cover member 430.

When the link pin 442a turns from the uppermost position to the lowermost position, the movable display unit 450
Is lowered from the initial position to the lower limit position, and the character decoration of the decorative cover member 430 of the upper fixing unit 410 becomes visible. Thereafter, when the drive motor 441 is driven forward so that the link pin 442a turns from the lowest position to the highest position, the movable display unit 450 is raised to the initial position.

The upper effect device 400 includes a position detection sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the slider 443, and based on this position detection sensor, it is determined whether the movable display unit 450 is in the initial position or the lower limit position. Is done. In the upper rendering device 400, the drive motor 4
By alternately repeating the normal rotation and the reverse rotation of 41, it is possible to execute a vibration effect that causes the movable display unit 450 to vibrate up and down.

[Right production device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, FIG. 26-FIG.

FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the right effect device 500. FIG. FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional perspective view of the right part rendering device 500. FIG. FIG. 28A is a perspective view of the movable decorative unit 550 and the drive mechanism 540 of the right effect device 500. FIG. FIG. 28B is a back view of right portion rendering apparatus 500 with fixed base 520 removed.

As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 26, the right part rendering device 500 is provided with the mounting recess 2 of the right decorative part 242.
The side fixing unit 510 is fixed to 42a, and the movable decorative unit 550 is slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the side fixing unit 510.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the movable decorative unit 550 includes a side fixing unit 510.
A mounting base 560 disposed in front of the decorative base 560, a decorative member 570 fixed to the front surface of the mounting base 560, a rotating cylinder 580 rotatably provided with respect to the decorative member 570, and a decorative member 57.
A pair of infrared sensors (human sensors) 590 attached to the lower part of 0.

The mounting base 560 is a flat plate-like member, and a decorative member 570 is provided on the front surface of the mounting base 560.
Is attached.

The decorative member 570 is a box-shaped member. An opening 571 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion of the decorative member 570, and the rotary cylinder 580 is disposed so as to be positioned in the opening 571. The upper end of the rotating cylinder 580 is formed as a closed end, and the lower end of the rotating cylinder 580 is formed as an open end.

A motor accommodating portion 572 that accommodates a drive motor 551 that rotationally drives the rotary cylinder 580 is formed at the upper portion of the decorative member 570, and a sensor accommodating portion 573 that accommodates the infrared sensor 590 is formed at the lower portion of the decorative member 570. ing.

In a state where the drive motor 551 is housed in the motor housing portion 572, the output shaft of the drive motor 551 is directed downward. The closed end (upper end) of the rotating cylinder 580 is fixed to the lower end of the output shaft of the drive motor 551.

In addition, an LED substrate 552 to be inserted into the rotary cylinder 580 through the opening end of the rotary cylinder 580 is fixed to the opening 571 of the decorative member 570. A plurality of LEDs 552 a for causing the rotary cylinder 580 to emit light are provided on the surface of the LED substrate 552.

The infrared sensor 590 is a non-contact human sensor that detects that a part of the player's body has entered the detection range. The detection range of the infrared sensor 590 will be described later with reference to FIG. Two infrared sensors 590 are arranged adjacent to each other in the left-right direction in the sensor housing portion 573 of the decorative member 570.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side fixing unit 510 includes a fixed base 520, a decorative cover member 530 attached to the front surface of the fixed base 520, and an accommodation space between the fixed base 520 and the decorative cover member 530. And a drive mechanism 540 that drives the movable decorative unit 550.

The fixed base 520 is a flat plate-like member, and is fixed to the mounting recess 242a of the right decorative portion 242. An attachment portion 521 for attaching the drive motor 541 of the drive mechanism 540 is formed on the front surface of the fixed base 520.

The decorative cover member 530 is a cover member that surrounds the drive mechanism 540 and is fixed to the fixed base 520. On the front surface of the decorative cover member 530, a character decoration of “Hold your hand up” is applied. In this character decoration, the movable decoration unit 550 is replaced by the side fixing unit 510.
When the movable decorative unit 550 is slid in the left direction, it is in a visible state.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 28A, the drive mechanism 540 includes a drive motor 54 as a drive source.
1, a disc-shaped cam link 542 fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 541, and a slider 543 linked to the cam link 542.

The slider 543 is a flat plate-like member extending in the vertical direction. Slider 543
A long hole 543 that penetrates the slider 543 in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction.
a. The link pin 542a of the cam link 542 is slidably inserted into the long hole 543a of the slider 543. The link pin 542a is fixed to the front surface of the cam link 542 at a position offset from the rotation center of the cam link 542.

Guide pins 543b protruding forward are provided at both upper and lower ends of the slider 543, and a guide groove 531 is formed in the decorative cover member 530 so that the guide pins 543b of the slider 543 are slidably engaged. Yes. The two guide grooves 531 extend in the left-right direction and are horizontally arranged in a state of being separated in the up-down direction. Slider 543
The guide pin 543b slides in the left-right direction as the guide pin 543b slides along the guide groove 531.

A pair of upper and lower connecting bosses 561 (see FIG. 28A) connected to the slider 543 are formed on the back surface of the mounting base 560 of the movable decorative unit 550.
The movable decorative unit 550 including the mounting base 560 is fixed to the slider 543 through 61. The decorative cover member 530 is formed with a guide groove 532 through which the connecting boss 561 of the mounting base 560 passes in the front-rear direction. The two guide grooves 532 extend in the left-right direction, and are horizontally disposed inside the two guide grooves 531 in a state of being separated in the up-down direction. The movable decorative unit 550 slides in the left-right direction as the connecting boss 561 slides along the guide groove 532.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the effect by the right effect device 500 is not executed, the drive motor 541 of the drive mechanism 540 is stopped and the link pin 542 of the cam link 542 is stopped.
a is located at the rightmost position on the most right side. At this time, the movable decorative unit 550 supported by the slider 543 is stopped at the front position (initial position) of the side fixing unit 510. When the movable decorative unit 550 is stopped at the initial position, the character decoration on the decorative cover member 530 of the side fixing unit 510 becomes invisible.

As shown in FIG. 28B, when the game progresses in the gaming machine 1 and enters a predetermined gaming state, the drive motor 541 of the drive mechanism 540 is driven to rotate forward, and the link pin 542a of the cam link 542 is connected to the link pin 542a of FIG. In the clockwise direction. When the link pin 542a turns and moves from the right limit position to the left while sliding through the long hole 543a of the slider 543, the slider 543 also moves to the left according to the position of the link pin 542a. As a result, the connecting boss 561 connected to the slider 543 moves along the guide groove 532, and the movable decorative unit 550 slides to the left with respect to the side fixing unit 510.

When the link pin 542a turns from the right limit position to the left limit position, the movable decorative unit 550 is moved.
Slides from the initial position to the left limit position on the left side, and the character decoration of the decorative cover member 530 of the side fixing unit 510 becomes visible. Thereafter, when the drive motor 541 is driven in reverse so that the link pin 542a turns from the left limit position to the right limit position, the movable decorative unit 550 slides to the initial position.

The right effect device 500 is configured to rotate the rotating cylinder 580 by the drive motor 551 when the movable decorative unit 550 is located at the left limit position and the infrared sensor 590 is in the detection state. At this time, a light emission effect using the LED 552a of the LED substrate 552 is also performed.

Note that the right effect device 500 includes a position detection sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the slider 543, and based on this position detection sensor, whether the movable decoration unit 550 is in the initial position or the left limit position. Is determined. Further, in the right direction rendering device 500, the drive motor 5
By alternately repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of 41, it is possible to execute a vibration effect that causes the movable decorative unit 550 to vibrate left and right.

[Wiring routing structure]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. 33, a description will be given of the wiring routing structure of the electrical components (here, the general diagram start gate 36 and the second special variable winning device 42) disposed on the game board 32.
As described above, the game board 32 according to the first embodiment of the present invention is a transparent member that can be seen through the back. For this reason, the rendering device unit 200 disposed in the decoration space between the game board 30 and the rear unit base member 210 (that is, the space composed of the upper accommodation space 214 and the lower accommodation space 215) It functions as a three-dimensional decorative member that is visually recognized by a person and produces a decorative effect. In addition, since the wiring of the electrical components arranged on the game board 30 and routed behind the game board 32 can be visually recognized by the player, a wiring process that does not disturb the decoration of the three-dimensional decoration member is desired.

FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the upper decoration unit 240 according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG.
0 is the upper decoration unit 24 with the game board 30 of the first embodiment of the present invention attached.
It is an upper left enlarged perspective view of 0. FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of the periphery of the universal start gate (gate switch 603 corresponds to a specific electrical component) 36 in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 32 is an enlarged view of the periphery of the big prize opening solenoid 28b and the upper count switch 606 (corresponding to a normal electric component) in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 33 is a rear perspective view of the peripheral portion of the universal start gate 36 in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 29, the upper decoration unit 240 that decorates the left and right side portions and the upper peripheral edge of the main display device (variable display device, main display) 35 in a front view in a substantially U shape is the left decoration portion 24.
1, a right decoration part 242, and an upper decoration part 243. FIG. 29 is the same as FIG.
1 is the same as the diagram included in FIG. 1, and already described components are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted as appropriate.

Since the distribution device 90 (see FIG. 3) of the center frame 34 is disposed above the right decoration portion 242 at a connection portion with the upper decoration portion 243, wiring of each sensor provided in the distribution device 90 is performed. A wiring opening 242b is provided on the back side of the upper decoration unit 240 for routing.

A wiring opening 243 c for routing the wiring of the upper effect device 400 (see FIG. 8) to the back side of the upper decoration unit 240 is provided in the mounting recess 243 a of the upper decoration portion 243.
Further, the upper decoration portion 243 is provided with an upper front decoration member 245 located behind the second special variable prize-winning device 42 (see FIG. 30). A wiring opening 245 a for routing the wiring of the second special variable winning device 42 to the back side of the upper decoration unit 240 is provided on the front surface of the upper front decoration member 245.

Here, the wiring routing structure of the second special variable winning device 42 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 32, in the state where the game board 30 is attached, the second special variation winning device 42 provided in the game area 31 is arranged in front of the upper front decorative member 245. In the second special variable winning device 42, the turning ball 42a is operated by the big winning port solenoid 28b, so that the game ball can be won in the second big winning port. The second grand prize opening is provided with an upper count switch 606 for detecting a winning game ball. The game balls that have won the second grand prize opening are the winning ball channels 44.
Led to. Then, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the wiring W2 of the special winning opening solenoid 28b and the upper count switch 606 is the wiring opening 245 located behind the rotating portion 42a.
A is led out of the decoration space from the wiring opening 212b on the back side of the unit base member 210 through a wiring lead-out path (not shown) formed inside a three-dimensional decoration member such as the upper front decoration member 245. . Thus, the upper front decorative member 245 functions as a shielding decorative portion that shields the wiring W2 from being exposed behind the game board 32 and has a decorative effect, and further connects the wiring W2 from the front wiring opening 245a to the inside. It also functions as a wiring lead-out portion for drawing in and pulling out to the back side.

Thus, the second special variable winning device 42 is located near the center of the game board 32 (upper decoration unit 24).
In the case of being arranged at the center of 0), the wiring W2 of the second special variable winning device 42 is routed to the back side of the three-dimensional decorative member via a wiring lead-out path provided in the rear three-dimensional decorative member, and the decorative space Derived out of. As a result, the wiring distance is short and efficient wiring processing can be performed as compared with the structure in which the wiring is routed to the end through the wiring W2 in front of the upper decoration unit 240, and the deterioration of the aesthetics and visibility behind the game board 32 is suppressed. can do. At this time, the wiring W <b> 2 protrudes from the upper decorative portion 243 of the upper decorative unit 240 and is provided on the upper front decorative member 24.
5 is pulled into the interior. As described above, the upper decoration unit 240 is provided so as to protrude in front of the upper decoration portion 243 (second decoration portion) of the base stored in the decoration space, and is close to or abuts on the back surface of the game board 32. (1st decoration part) is provided. Upper decoration part 2
The upper front decorative member 245 closer to the game board 32 than 43 is provided with a wiring opening 245a,
Since the wiring W2 is drawn into the inside from the wiring opening 245a, the exposure amount of the wiring W2 behind the game board 32 can be reduced, and the deterioration of the aesthetic appearance behind the game board can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 29, 30 and 32, above the upper front decorative member 245,
Dummy accommodating part 243 that makes it appear as if the magnetic sensor 23 for detecting fraud is accommodated
b is projected. Such a dummy accommodating part 243b is provided in a place where a dishonest act does not occur or in a place where it reacts to a device having other magnetism (for example, the second special variable winning device 42). The player cannot determine the presence or absence of the magnetic sensor 23. By providing the dummy accommodating portion 243b as described above, it is possible to make the player think that a large number of magnetic sensors 23 are installed, and thus an effect of giving up the illegal act is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 29, a front side decorative portion 246 is projected from the front surface of the left decorative portion 241. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the side front decoration portion 246 is located behind the usual start gate 36 so that the wiring W1 of the gate switch 603 extending from the back of the game board 32 to the decoration space passes forward. It is arranged. Specifically, the wiring W1 of the gate switch 603 passes through the rear of the flange portion 36b of the gate member 36a and the front of the side front decorative portion 246 and is routed to the end thereof. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the wiring W1 is led out of the decoration space from the wiring opening 212a formed in the side wall 212 of the unit base member 210 in the front-rear direction, and is wired along the wiring opening 212a. It is led out to the back side of the unit base member 210.
The unit base member 210 also functions as a wiring lead-out section that routes the wiring W1 out of the decoration space through the wiring opening 212a.

Here, the side front decorative portion 246 is arranged in a color similar to that of the wiring W1. As a result, the wiring W1 passing in front of the side front decorative portion 246 becomes inconspicuous.
2 and the visibility of the side front decorative part 246 can be suppressed. In addition,
The side front decorative portion 246 is provided with a striped pattern or cut in the same direction as the wiring direction of the wiring W1 (here, the left-right direction), and the same effect can be obtained whether or not the same color as the wiring W1 is obtained. You may do it.

In this way, when the normal start gate 36 is disposed near the end of the game board 32 (the end of the decoration space), the wiring W1 of the general start gate 36 is placed in front of the rear upper decoration unit 240. It passes through to the end and passes through the wiring opening 212a provided on the side and is led out of the decoration space. At this time, since it is not necessary to form a wiring lead-out portion on the front surface of the upper decoration unit 240 (an area visible to the player through the game board 32), it is possible to prevent the decoration of the upper decoration unit 240 from being deteriorated. .

In addition, a decorative plate (shielding plate) 34e (see FIG. 6) for shielding the special winning opening solenoid 28b is provided in front of the special winning opening solenoid 28b of the second special variation winning apparatus 42 described above. The decorative board 34e regulates that the big winning opening solenoid 28b is directly visible to the player, and can prevent the appearance around the second special variable winning device 42 from being damaged. Further, since the wiring of the big prize opening solenoid 28b passes behind the decoration board 34e and is led to the wiring opening 245a, the big winning hole solenoid 2 is guided by the decoration board 34e.
It becomes difficult to visually recognize the wiring 8b. Further, since the gate switch 603 of the usual start gate 36 is in a state where the front side is covered with the gate member 36a (see FIG. 31), the gate member 36a functions as a member that shields the gate switch 603. This restricts the gate switch 603 from being directly visible to the player.
6. It is possible to prevent the surrounding aesthetics from being damaged. Furthermore, since the wiring of the gate switch 603 passes behind the flange portion 36b provided in the gate member 36a, the wiring of the gate switch 603 is difficult to visually recognize by the flange portion 36b.

As described above, in the first embodiment of the present invention, the wiring W1 of the general start gate 36 (second electrical component) near the end of the game area 31 (decoration space) is the upper decoration unit 240 (three-dimensional decoration member).
Is drawn out of the decoration space by being routed along the wiring opening 212 a of the unit base member 210, while the second special variable winning device 42 ( The wiring W2 of the first electrical component is led out of the decoration space through the wiring opening 245a of the upper decoration unit 240 through the inside. Then, the wirings W1 and W2 led out of the decoration space (the back side of the unit base member 210) are connected to the game control device 600. As described above, since the wiring routing structure is applied according to the arrangement of the electrical components, efficient wiring processing is possible.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the magnetic sensor housing portion 24 near the universal start gate 36.
The shape of 1b is the same as that of the dummy accommodating portion 243b. The magnetic sensor housing portion 241b
A magnetic sensor 23 for detecting fraud is actually accommodated. Thus, by providing the magnetic sensor housing part 241b and the dummy housing part 243b that cannot be distinguished at a glance in the game area 31, and providing the magnetic sensor 23 at a place where the occurrence rate of fraudulent acts is high, Discovery and prevention can be done. In the first embodiment of the present invention, the magnetic sensor housing portion 241b and the dummy housing portion 243b are disposed in the left decorative portion 241 and the upper decorative portion 243 (that is, the upper decorative unit 240), respectively. You may arrange | position to the game board 32 side.

[Charging unit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34 to FIG. 40, a description will be given of a static elimination unit 900 that releases static electricity charged on the transparent resin game board 32 to the frame (here, the glass frame 6) side. As described above, in the first embodiment of the present invention, the reinforcing sheet metal 6b (see FIG. 2) is provided on the back surface of the glass frame 6, and the static elimination unit 900 (see FIGS. 3 and 5) is located above the right side of the game board 30. Reference) is provided. Then, in a state in which the game board 30 is housed in the frame body (opening / closing frame 4) composed of the glass frame 6 and the front frame 5, the metal conductive member 901 provided in the static elimination unit 900 contacts the reinforcing sheet metal 6 b of the glass frame 6. To ground. The mechanism will be described below.

FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing a mounting state of the static eliminator unit 900 provided in the game board 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 35 shows a static elimination unit 90 according to the first embodiment of this invention.
FIG. FIG. 36 is a rear perspective view of the static elimination unit 900 according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 37 shows the static elimination unit 9 in FIG. 34 of the first embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 38 and 39 are vertical cross-sectional views showing an operation mode of the static elimination unit 900 when housed in the frame (opening / closing frame 4) of the first embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 39, a mounting portion 902 for attaching the static elimination unit 900 is formed above the right side of the game board 30 by a partition member 32 b on the front surface of the game board 32. The static elimination unit 900 has a screw hole 903 that opens to the front surface, and after being attached to the attachment portion 902,
The game board 32 is fixed to the screw hole 903 through the screw 904. Cutouts 32f and 213a are formed in the game board 32 and the spacer member 213 of the unit base member 210 positioned behind the mounting portion 902, respectively, below the fastening position by the screw 904. These notches 32
f and 213a are formed so that a protruding pressing portion 5d (see FIG. 38) provided on the front frame 5 can be inserted when the game board 30 is stored in the front frame 5.

Here, the static eliminator unit 900 includes a base member 907 having an accommodation space forming portion 905 and a rail conductive portion 906, a conductive member 901 that can contact the reinforcing sheet metal 6b of the glass frame 6, and a conductive member that can contact the guide rail 32a. 908. The guide rail 32a may be directly attached to the game board 32, or may be attached to the partition member 32b. In short, the method of attaching to the game board 32 can be arbitrarily set as long as the charged static electricity can be collected on the launched game ball or game board.

The base member 907 has a box shape with an open rear surface, and the accommodating space forming portion 905 forms an accommodating space 905a capable of accommodating the conductive member 901 from the opened rear surface. In addition, the rail conduction portion 906 is a guide rail 3 that partitions the game area 31 on the side surface of the accommodation space forming portion 905.
It protrudes so that it can contact 2a. Here, an L-shaped conducting member 908 is attached to the rear surface of the rail conducting portion 906. An insertion part 906a into which the conduction member 908 and the guide rail 32a can be inserted is provided at the end of the rail conduction part 906, and the contact part of the conduction member 908 inserted into the insertion part 906a as shown in FIG. 908a and guide rail 32a
Is caused to flow to the conduction member 908 of the static elimination unit 900 through the guide rail 32a. The other end of the conductive member 908 is provided with a fixed portion 908b fixed to the game board 32 together with the base member 907 and the conductive member 901 by a screw 904. The contact portion 908a extends from the guide rail 32a. The static electricity that has flowed to the conductive member 908 via the first member is caused to flow to the conductive member 901 via the fixed portion 908b.

The upper end portion of the conductive member 901 is in contact with the fixed portion 908b of the conducting member 908 on the front surface, and is in contact with the game board 32 on the rear surface. As described above, the game board 32 is attached by the screw 904 together with the base member 907 and the conducting member 908. A fixed portion 901a is provided to be fixed to the head. Further, a press receiving portion 901b is provided below the fixed portion 901a. As shown in FIG.
In a state where 0 is not attached to the front frame 5, the press receiving portion 901 b projects and faces the cutout portion 32 f of the game board 32. As shown in FIG. 38, when the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 5, the press receiving portion 901b is pushed forward by the protruding pressing portion 5d of the front frame 5 inserted through the notch 32f. A contact portion 901d is provided below the pressure receiving portion 901b via a flat plate portion 901c inclined forward and downward. At this time, the flat plate portion 901c
Are arranged along the upper surface of the support portion 907 a provided on the rear surface of the base member 907.

As shown in FIG. 37, the contact portion 901d of the conductive member 901 is within the accommodation space 905a of the base member 907 when the game board 30 is not attached to the front frame 5 (
Maintain the buried state. On the other hand, in the state where the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 5 as shown in FIG. 38, the conductive member 901 comes into contact with the forward pushing of the press receiving portion 901b by the protruding pressing portion 5d of the front frame 5. The part 901d is also pushed forward. And the press receiving part 9
When 01b is completely pushed out from the notch 32f, the contact portion 901d is moved to the base member 907.
It changes from the exposed opening 907b provided in the front surface of the (accommodating space forming portion 905) to the outside (outside the game board 30).

Thus, the conductive member 901 functions as a leaf spring that is elastically deformed when the pressure receiving portion 901b receives a forward force. As shown in FIG. 39, when the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 is closed in a state where the contact portion 901d is converted from the buried state to the protruding state, the contact portion 901d is attached to the back surface of the glass frame 6. The conducting portion 6c of the reinforcing sheet metal 6b provided comes into contact. Thereby, the conductive member 901 causes the static electricity of the game board 30 to flow through the glass frame 6 through the conduction portion 6c.
It can be removed and removed.

At this time, a stopper portion 901e that restricts the forward protrusion of the contact portion 901d is provided below the contact portion 901d and at the lower end of the conductive member 901, and the stopper portion 901e serves as the exposure opening 907b of the base member 907. The protruding state of the contact portion 901d is stabilized by being locked to the operation restricting portion 907c that forms the lower frame.

The static eliminator unit 900 according to the first embodiment of the present invention includes the conductive member 90 in a state where the game board 30 is not housed in the front frame 5, that is, in a situation where the game board 30 is transported or detached.
1 maintains a buried state that is not exposed from the base member 907 (accommodating space 905a), so that the conductive member 901 can prevent the operator from being injured. Meanwhile, the game board 30
Is housed in the front frame 5, the conductive member 901 is converted from a buried state to a protruding state protruding outside the base member 907 by the protruding pressing portion 5 d of the front frame 5. When the glass frame 6 is closed when the conductive member 901 is in the protruding state, the conductive portion 6c of the reinforcing sheet metal 6b functions as a ground member that contacts the contact portion 901d and removes static electricity charged in the game board 30.

As described above, the static eliminator unit 900 of the present invention can surely remove the static electricity charged on the resin game board 32 by letting it escape to the frame side (here, the glass frame 6). Moreover, since the attitude | position state of the electrically-conductive member 901 is converted according to the accommodation condition of the game board 30, a safe conveyance work and attachment / detachment work can be provided. Further, the state conversion operation of the conductive member 901 and the contact operation with the ground member are completed with the operation of storing the game board 30 in the storage frame body composed of the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6, so no special static elimination operation is required. It is. And the efficient static elimination can be provided, without the accommodation work efficiency of the game board 30 falling.

The guide rail 32a provided on the game board 32 and defining the game area 31 functions as a charging member that collects the static electricity charged on the game board 32. The guide rail 32a and the game board 30
The conductive member 901 of the static eliminator unit 900 provided at the end of the conductive member 901 is electrically connected via the conductive member 908. By providing a charging member that collects static electricity on the game board 32 that is easily charged, the current collection efficiency is improved, and the static electricity charged on the game board 32 can be efficiently removed.

Note that the charging member of the game board 30 that contacts the contact portion 908a of the conducting member 908 is not limited to the guide rail 32a. As long as it is provided on the game board 30 and is a highly conductive member, a decorative plated part may be used. In order for the decorative member attached to the game board 32 to face the game area 31 to function as a charging member, a metal film may be attached to the decorative member.
The charging member facing the game area 31 can be disposed without impairing the aesthetic appearance of 1 (the back of the game board 32).

Further, the base member 907 of the static elimination unit 900 is fixed to the game board 32 with screws 904 while being sandwiched between the partition member 32 b provided in front of the game board 32 and the game board 32. As a result, the base member 907 that supports the conductive member 901 is firmly fixed to the game board 32 and stabilized.

Here, a highly conductive screw 904 is used as a fastening member for fastening the static elimination unit 900 to the game board 32. At this time, not only the base member 907 but also the conductive member 901 are fixed to the game board 32 together. Therefore, the static electricity charged on the game board 32 is transferred to the conductive member 9 via the fastening member.
Therefore, the neutralization efficiency is improved.

In the first embodiment of the present invention, the static eliminator unit 900 when the glass frame 6 is closed.
The conductive member 901 is configured to be grounded to the outer frame side (glass frame 6) of the frame (opening / closing frame 4), but may be configured to be grounded to the inner frame side (front frame 5).

(Modification)
FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a static elimination unit according to a modification of the first embodiment of this invention. FIG.
(A) is a perspective view, and FIG. 40 (B) is a longitudinal sectional view in a state of being attached to a frame.

In the modification, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, a protective wall 907d is projected forward along the left and right frames of the exposed opening 907b of the base member 907. The protective wall 907d is provided so as to be able to cover the contact portion 901d from the left and right sides when the contact portion 901d of the conductive member 901 is in a protruding state. At this time, the conducting portion 6c of the reinforcing sheet metal 6b of the glass frame 6 is provided with the protective wall 907d. In contact with the contact portion 901d.

Thereby, the side edge of the contact part 901d of the conductive member 901 which is a thin plate can be protected from damage and deformation.

The structure of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment has been described above. Next, control of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. First, game specifications in the present embodiment will be described.

[Game machine specifications]
FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating the specifications of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of this invention. (A) is the specification of the variable display game, (B) is the percentage of occurrence of each jackpot state (special game state) when the special figure variable display game has a special result, (C) is the lottery gate (variation part, No. 1) 1 pass gate part 34g
) In the round distribution table 1 including the selection probability of the number of rounds in the big hit state when the game ball passes, (D) is the case where the game ball passes through the fixed gate (fixed part, second passing gate part 34h) The round distribution table 2 including the number of rounds in the big hit state is shown.

Referring to (A), in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to 1/300 in the low probability state, and the jackpot probability is set to 1/50 in the high probability state (probability variation state).

Further, when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game, the game shifts to a probability variation state with a probability of 65/100. Specifically, as shown in (B), three types of first special result probability big hit, second special result normal big hit, and second special result certain big hit are generated, which are 5/100 and 35/10, respectively.
It is selected with a probability of 0, 60/100.

The number of rounds in the big hit state can be selected from 5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds, and 16 rounds. In the first special outcome probability big hit, 16 rounds are always selected. On the other hand, in the case of the second special result normal big hit and the second special result probable big hit, either 5 rounds, 10 rounds or 15 rounds are selected.

Specifically, as described above, when a game ball passes through the lottery gate of the sorting device 90,
As shown in (C), 5 or 15 rounds are selected with a probability of 50/100.
On the other hand, when a game ball passes through the fixed gate, 10 rounds are always selected as shown in (D).

Finally, the general map change display game will be described. In this embodiment, when the power transmission support state (electric power support state, short-time state or certain change state) is not (non-power support state), the win probability of the general-purpose fluctuation display game is set to 0/128. It is set not to win.

On the other hand, in the case of the general electric power support state, the winning probability of the general map fluctuation display game is 127/128.
It is set to win almost certainly. When a win-win game is selected, the ordinary electric accessory is released for 1.5 seconds, and this opening is repeated three times.
Also, a plurality of opening patterns may be defined, and the ordinary electric accessory may be opened in any one of the opening patterns by lottery.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation display game is one second regardless of whether or not the normal power support state is set. When a value greater than 0 is set for the winning probability of the normal map variation display game in the non-electric support state and the variation time is set to be longer, it takes time until the normal variation display game ends. , There is a risk that it will not be possible to shift to the ordinary power support state immediately after the special gaming state ends. 0 win probability for the game with variable display
By setting the variable time to be constant, it becomes possible to shift to the normal power support state immediately after the special game state is finished.

It should be noted that even in the non-electric support state, a value greater than 0 may be set for the winning probability of the normal fluctuation display game. Furthermore, a plurality of release patterns may be set. For example, in addition to the normal normal power short circuit open, a normal power long open that opens the ordinary electric utility for a relatively long time with a predetermined probability may be included. A special effect may be executed during the opening of the long-term service.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, two start winning holes are provided. However, regardless of which start winning hole is won, the first special result probability big hit, the second special result normal big hit, and the second special win For example, when a game ball wins the second starting winning prize opening, the probability of being assigned to the first special result promising winning jack is increased. You may set so that it may become more advantageous when a ball wins.

Subsequently, state transition in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG.
FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating state transition in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, in a normal state, when a game ball wins a start winning opening, a variable display game is started. When the variable display game is out of play, the normal state is restored.

In the case where the result of the variable display game is the first special result, as described with reference to FIG. At this time, the second special variable winning device 42 disposed on the upper portion of the center frame 34 is opened.

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display game is the second special result, the player determines that the distribution device 90
The game ball is fired toward the direction, and the game ball is allowed to pass through a lottery gate (first pass gate portion 34g) or a fixed gate (second pass gate portion 34h).

As described above, when the player selects the lottery gate (first passing gate portion 34g) and passes the game ball, 5 or 15 rounds are selected in the lottery. On the other hand, when the fixed gate (second passing gate portion 34h) is selected, 10 rounds are always selected.

In this embodiment, the probability that 5 rounds are selected and the probability that 15 rounds are selected are set to 50/100, respectively, but are selected when the lottery gate (the first passing gate portion 34g) is selected. If the expected number of rounds to be set is set to 10 rounds, another round number may be set. For example, 4 rounds and 16 rounds are 5
The selection may be made with a probability of 0/100, or 5 rounds, 10 rounds, and 15 rounds may be selected with equal probability.

Therefore, the player may select a fixed gate so that 10 rounds of winning balls can be obtained without fail, or may select a lottery gate capable of acquiring more winning balls, depending on preference. can do.

In addition, when the result of the variable display game is the second special result, when the special game state is started, an attacker-type first special variable prize winning device 41 arranged at the lower right of the game board 30 is displayed. Only the selected number of rounds are released.

[Game control device / effect control device]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described.

FIG. 43 is a block configuration diagram showing a control system centering on the game control device 600 of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 44 is a block configuration diagram showing a control system centering on the effect control device 700 of the gaming machine 1.

A game control device 600 shown in FIG. 43 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls games in the gaming machine 1. The game control device 600 includes a power supply device 800 and a payout control device 640.
And an effect control device 700 are connected. The game control device 600 transmits a control signal (command) to the payout control device 640 and the effect control device 700 to instruct execution of various processes. Furthermore, the game control device 600 is connected to various switches, solenoids to be controlled, and the like.

The game control device 600 includes a CPU unit 610 that performs various arithmetic processes, an input unit 620 that receives input of various signals, and an output unit 630 that outputs various signals and control signals. CPU
The unit 610, the input unit 620, and the output unit 630 are connected to each other by a data bus 680.

The input unit 620 receives signals output from various switches provided on the game board 30 and the like and signals output from the payout control device 640. The input unit 620 includes a proximity interface (I / F) 621 (621a, 621b) and an input port 622 (622a, 622).
b) and 623.

The input ports 622 and 623 receive a signal input via the proximity I / F 621 or directly receive a signal input from the outside. Information input to the input ports 622 and 623 is provided to the CPU unit 610 and the like via the data bus 680.

The proximity I / F 621 is an interface that receives signals output from various switches, converts the input signals, and outputs the converted signals to the input port 622. A first start port switch 601, a second start port switch 602, a gate switch 603, winning port switches 604a to 604n, and lower count switches 605a to 605m are connected to the proximity I / F 621a. The proximity I / F 621b includes an upper count switch 606 and a first passage detection sensor 6.
07a and the second passage detection sensor 607b are connected.

The first start port switch 601 is a switch that detects that a game ball has won the first start winning port 37. The second start port switch 602 is a switch that detects that a game ball has won the second start winning port 38. As for the gate switch 603, the game ball is usually started by the start gate 36.
It is a switch that detects passing through. The winning award opening switches 604a to 604n are switches for detecting that the game ball has won the general winning opening 40.

The lower count switches 605a to 605m and the upper count switch 606 are switches that detect that a game ball has won a big winning opening. Lower count switches 605a to 605
When the winning of the game ball is detected by the m and the upper count switch 606, the number of the winning game balls is counted, and the counted number of the game balls is stored in a memory provided in the game control device 600.

The first passage detection sensor 607a detects that the game ball has passed through the first passage gate portion 34g provided in the sorting device 90. Similarly, the second passage detection sensor 607b detects that a game ball has passed through the second passage gate portion 34h.

The proximity I / F 621 receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from various switches, and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Proximity I /
Since F621 is normally within a predetermined range (7V-11V), the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

It should be noted that the proximity I / F is removed by attaching / detaching the connector of the switch connected to the proximity I / F 621.
Since the output value (ON / OFF) of the signal input to 621 switches, the proximity I / F 621
Is configured to maintain a constant output even when no switch is connected.

The reason for providing two proximity I / Fs, the proximity I / F 621a and the proximity I / F 621b, is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 621a is limited. The proximity I / F 621b may be smaller than the proximity I / F 621a depending on the number of input terminals that are insufficient, so that the cost may be reduced. Note that the proximity I / F 621b may not be provided by using the proximity I / F 621a having a necessary number of input terminals.

Of the output of the proximity I / F 621, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 24 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the input port 622a. Further, the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 23 provided on the front frame 5 of the gaming machine 1 or the like is also input to the input port 622a.

The magnetic sensor 23 detects a magnetic force in order to detect an illegal act of manipulating the trajectory of the launched game ball with a magnet. The radio wave sensor 24 detects a radio wave irradiated toward the gaming machine 1 in order to detect an illegal act that causes the prize opening switch 604 or the like to malfunction. Note that a vibration sensor that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the input port 622a.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 621, the output to the input port 622b is supplied from the game control device 600 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 650. Further, the detection signals of the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602 among the outputs of the proximity I / F 621 are input to the gaming microcomputer 611 via the inverting circuit 612 in addition to the input port 622b. It is configured. The inversion circuit 612 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 611 assumes that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input, and detects negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

Therefore, when using a micro switch as the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602, it is possible to directly input the detection signal to the gaming microcomputer 611 without providing the inverting circuit 612. . That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602 to the gaming microcomputer 611, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / F 621 is
It has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I /
A voltage of 12V is supplied to F621 from the power supply device 800 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5V necessary for normal IC operation.

A signal from the magnetic sensor 23 is directly input to the input port 622a, and the input port 62
3 includes a front frame opening detection switch (SW) 25 and a glass frame opening detection switch (SW) 26.
The signal from is directly input. The input port 623 also receives a status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the payout control device 640.

The front frame opening detection SW 25 detects that the front frame 5 is opened. Front frame open detection S
W25 is set to ON when the front frame 5 is released from the main body frame 2, and is set to OFF when the front frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 2.

The glass frame open detection SW 26 detects that the glass frame 6 has been opened. The glass frame open detection SW 26 is set to ON when the glass frame 6 is released from the front frame 5, and is set to OFF when the glass frame 6 is closed to the front frame 5.

The data held by the input port 622b is stored in the input port 62 by the gaming microcomputer 611.
The address can be read by asserting (changing to an effective level) the enable signal CE2 by decoding the address assigned to 2b. Input port 62
The same applies to 2a and an input port 623 described later.

The CPU unit 610 of the game control device 600 includes a game microcomputer 611, an inversion circuit 612, and a crystal oscillator 613.

The gaming microcomputer 611 includes a CPU 611a, a ROM 611b, and a RAM 611c, and executes various processes such as a big hit lottery by executing a program stored in the ROM 611b based on a signal input via the input unit 620. . Through the output unit 630, the gaming microcomputer 611 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51, a second special figure fluctuation display unit (
Special figure 2 display) 52, special figure change display part (common figure display) 53, special figure 1 hold display part 54, special figure 2 hold display part 55, general figure hold display part 56, high probability display part 57, Collective display device 50 comprising a special-purpose / general-purpose LED board or the like provided with a short-time state display unit 58 and a round number display unit 59
The control signal is transmitted to the general electric solenoid 27, the special prize opening solenoid 28, the effect control device 700, and the payout control device 640, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled in an integrated manner. The gaming microcomputer 611
A port for inputting or outputting a signal is selected by chip select.

The ROM 611b is a non-volatile storage medium and stores programs, data, and the like for game control.

The RAM 611c is a volatile storage medium, and is used as a work area for temporarily storing information (for example, random number values) necessary for game control.

The inverting circuit 612 is a signal input via the proximity I / F 621 (first start port switch 6
The logic value of 01 and the signal from the second start port switch 602 is inverted to make the gaming microcomputer 6
11 is output.

The crystal oscillator 613 is configured as an operating clock source of a hard random number for performing a timer interrupt, a system clock signal, a big hit lottery, and the like.

The output unit 630 of the game control device 600 includes ports 631 a to 631 e and a buffer 632.
a, 632b, drivers 633a to 633d, and a photocoupler 634.

The ports 631a to 631e receive signals input via the data bus 680.

The buffers 632a and 632b temporarily hold signals input via the data bus 680 and the ports 631a and 631b.

The drivers 633a to 633d generate various drive signals from the signals input via the ports 631c to 631e and output them to each device.

The photocoupler 634 is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 670, and removes noise from various signals that are input and output to shape the waveforms of the various signals. Information is transmitted and received between the photocoupler 634 and the inspection device 670 by serial communication.

The payout control device 640 is connected to the CPU unit 61 by parallel communication via the port 631a.
Information output from 0 is transmitted. Specifically, a 4-bit data signal and a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating the validity / invalidity of the data are output. Since there is no need to secure one-way communication for the payout control device 640, a control signal is directly transmitted from the port 631a to the payout control board of the payout control device 640.

Further, the payout control device 640 outputs a firing permission signal to the firing control device. The launch control device can launch a game ball into the game area 31 only when a launch permission signal is input.

The payout control device 640 discharges the winning ball from the payout unit (not shown) based on the prize ball command signal from the game control device 600, or the payout unit based on the lending request signal from the card unit (not shown). Or renting a ball. As described above, the payout control device 640 outputs a payout abnormality status signal, a shot ball shortage switch signal, and an overflow switch signal to the game control device 600 when a failure such as a ball breakage or a failure occurs.

The payout abnormality status signal is a signal output when the game ball is not paid out normally. The payout chute ball switch signal is a signal that is output when there is a shortage of game balls before payout. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 14 (see FIG. 1). Game control device 600
To the effect control device 700, data is transmitted by serial communication.

Subcommands are input to the effect control device 700 via the buffer 632a of the output unit 630. By having the buffer 632a, it becomes possible to prevent a signal from being input to the game control device 600 from the side of the effect control device 700, and unidirectional communication can be secured. The subcommand transmitted to the effect control device 700 includes a change start command,
Production control command signals such as a customer waiting demo command, a fanfare command, a probability information command, and an error designation command are included.

The grand prize winning solenoid 28 and the ordinary electric solenoid 27 include a port 631b and a driver 6
A signal output from the CPU unit 610 is input via 33a. Grand prize opening solenoid 2
8a rotates the opening / closing door 41a (see FIG. 3) of the first special variable winning device 41, and the large winning opening solenoid 28b rotates the rotating portion 42a (see FIG. 3) of the second special variable winning device 42. The ordinary electric solenoid 27 is movable so that the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 38.
8a is converted to an open state.

The collective display device 50 includes a special figure / common figure LED substrate and a case member for accommodating the special figure / general figure LED substrate. The anode terminal of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 is connected to the driver 633c via a segment line, and the driver 633c and the port 631c are connected. The cathode terminal of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 is connected to the driver 633 via a digit line.
The driver 633b and the port 631b are connected. Collective display device 5
An ON / OFF drive signal from the driver 633c is input to the anode terminal of the LED of 0,
An on / off drive signal is output from the cathode terminal of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 to the driver 633b.

The external information terminal 660 is provided with a photo relay, and is a terminal for outputting game data such as a start signal indicating the start of a variable display game and a special prize signal indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to the information collecting terminal device. The game data is output to the external information terminal 660 via the port 631e and the driver 633d.

The game control device 600 is configured to be connectable to an external test test device via a relay board 650. The test firing test apparatus is an apparatus for performing a type test of the gaming machine 1 in a predetermined engine. The test firing test apparatus includes a first start port switch 601, a second start port switch 602, a gate switch 603, winning port switches 604a to 604n, and a lower count switch 605a.
Signals necessary for the test test, such as signals from ˜605 m and the upper count switch 606, and signals output to the special winning opening solenoid 28 and the general electric solenoid 27 are input.

The game control device 600 is connected to the power supply device 800 via a Schmitt circuit 624 provided in the input unit 620. The Schmitt circuit 624 is a circuit that removes fluctuation (noise) of the input signal in order to prevent the operation of the gaming machine 1 from becoming unstable when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. The Schmitt circuit 624 receives a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 800.

The power supply device 800 generates an AC-DC voltage of DC32V from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 810 having a converter and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and a gaming microcomputer 611
Backup power supply unit 820 for supplying power supply voltage to the internal RAM 611c at the time of power failure
And a control signal generator that has a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch, and generates and outputs a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, a reset signal, and the like that notify the game control device 600 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure 830.

The backup power supply unit 820 is a power supply for backing up game data stored in the RAM 611c of the game microcomputer 611. After the power failure is restored, the game control device 600
Based on the game data held in the AM 611c, the game state before the power failure is restored.

The control signal generator 830 monitors the input voltage (guaranteed DC 32V) of the switching regulator that generates DC 12V and DC 5V. Detection voltage is DC17.2V ~ DC20.0
When it is V, it is determined that there is a power failure, and a power failure monitoring signal is output from the control signal generator 830. The power failure monitoring signal is input to the input port 623 of the input unit 620 via the Schmitt circuit 624. After the power failure monitoring signal is output, the power failure monitoring circuit outputs a reset signal. The reset signal is input to each port 631a to 631e of the gaming microcomputer 611 and the output unit 630 via the Schmitt circuit 624. When the game control device 600 receives the power failure monitoring signal, the game control device 600 performs a predetermined power failure process, and stops the operation of the CPU unit 610 after receiving the reset signal.

The control signal generation unit 830 includes an initialization switch (not shown), and an initialization switch signal is output from the control signal generation unit 830 when the initialization switch is in an ON state when the power is turned on. The initialization switch signal is input to the input unit 62 via the Schmitt circuit 624.
Input to 0 input port 623. The initialization switch signal is generated by the RA of the gaming microcomputer 611.
This is a signal forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM of M611c and the payout control device 640.

As described above, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once input to the input port 623, taken into the game microcomputer 611 via the data bus 680, and are handled as signals equivalent to signals from various switches. . This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 611 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise is removed by the Schmitt circuit 624 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 611 as described above,
This is supplied to each port of the output unit 630. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 650 without going through the output unit 630, so that the relay board 6 can be output to the test firing test apparatus.
The test test signal held in 50 ports (not shown) is turned off.
Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 650. Note that the reset signal RST is transmitted from the ports 622 and 623 of the input unit 620.
Is not supplied. Data set to each port of the output unit 630 by the gaming microcomputer 611 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 620 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 611 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 611 is reset.

The production control device 700 shown in FIG. 44 has a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 710 composed of an amusement chip (IC) in the same manner as the game microcomputer 611 of the game control device 600.
And a video control microcomputer (2ndC) that performs video control and the like under the control of the main control microcomputer 710.
PU) 720 and VDP (Video Display Procedures) that performs image processing for video display on the variable display device 35 (see FIG. 2) in accordance with commands and data from the video control microcomputer 720.
sor) 730, and a sound source LSI 705 for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b.

PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory) 702 and 703 storing programs executed by the CPUs are connected to the main control microcomputer 710 and the video control microcomputer 720, respectively.

An image ROM 704 in which character images and video data are stored is connected to the VDP 730.

  The sound source LSI 705 is connected to an audio ROM 706 that stores audio data and the like.

The main control microcomputer 710 analyzes the command transmitted from the game microcomputer 611 of the game control device 600, instructs the video control microcomputer 720 about the contents of the output video,
Instructs the contents of the reproduced sound to SI705. The main control microcomputer 710 also executes processing such as LED lighting control, various motor drive control, and production time management based on a control command from the game control device 600.

RAM 7 that provides work areas for main control microcomputer 710 and video control microcomputer 720
11 and 721 are provided inside each chip. R that provides the work area
The AMs 711 and 721 may be provided outside the chip.

Between the main control microcomputer 710 and the video control microcomputer 720, the main control microcomputer 710
And the tone generator LSI 705 are configured to transmit and receive data in a serial manner. In contrast, the main control microcomputer 710 and the VDP 730 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in the parallel system, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial system.

In the VDP 730, a VRAM (video RAM) 731 used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 704, an image is enlarged,
A scaler 732 for reduction processing and a signal conversion circuit 733 for generating a video signal to be transmitted to the variation display device 35 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method are provided.

From the VDP 730 to the main control microcomputer 710, an image of the fluctuation display device 35 and the front frame 5 are displayed.
And the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC to synchronize the lighting of LEDs and the like provided on the game board 30
Is output. Also, the VRAM 731 from the VDP 730 to the video control microcomputer 720
An interrupt signal INT0-n and a wait signal WAIT for informing that a command or data is waiting to be received from the video control microcomputer 720 are output in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing.

From the video control microcomputer 720 to the main control microcomputer 710, the video control microcomputer 72
A synchronization signal SYNC is output that informs that 0 is operating normally and gives command transmission timing.

Between the main control microcomputer 710 and the tone generator LSI 705, an interrogation signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged in order to transmit and receive commands and data by the handshake method.

Note that the video control microcomputer 720 uses a CPU capable of performing higher-speed processing than the main control microcomputer 710. Video control microcomputer 720 separately from main control microcomputer 710
By sharing the processing, it is possible to display a fast-moving image on a large screen, which is difficult to achieve with only the main control microcomputer 710, on the variable display device 35, and is equivalent to the image control microcomputer 720. An increase in cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where two CPUs having processing capability are used.

The effect control device 700 includes an interface chip (command I / F) 701 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 600. The production control device 700
A change start command transmitted from the game control device 600 via the command I / F 701,
A customer waiting demo command, a fanfare command, a probability information command, an error designation command, and the like are received as an effect control command signal. Game microcomputer 611 of game control device 600
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 710 of the effect control device 700 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 701 has a signal level conversion function.

The effect control device 700 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 741 for controlling a panel decoration device 760 including LEDs and the like provided on the center frame 34 and the game board 30, and a frame decoration device 21 including LEDs and the like provided on the front frame 5 and the like. Frame decoration LED control circuit 742 for controlling the display, variable display device 3
5 is a panel effect motor / SOL (solenoid) control circuit 743 for driving and controlling a panel effect device 770 including an electric accessory and a decorative member 7 that enhance the effect in cooperation with the effect display in FIG. A frame effect motor control circuit 74 for driving and controlling the frame effect device 22 including a motor and the like.
4 is provided. These control circuits (741 to 744) are connected to the address / data bus 7
40 is connected to the main control microcomputer 710.

Further, the effect control device 700 includes an effect button SW (switch) 751 for detecting that the effect button 17 or the selection button 29 (see FIG. 1) is operated, and an effect motor for detecting that various drive motors are driven. SW (switch) 752a to 752n and switch (SW) input circuit 750 for detecting the on / off state of human sensor (infrared sensor) 590 and transmitting a detection signal to main control microcomputer 710 are provided. Further, amplifier circuits 707 and 708 including audio power amplifiers for driving the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b.
Is provided.

The normal power supply unit 810 of the power supply device 800 includes the effect control device 700 and the effect control device 70.
In order to supply a predetermined level of DC voltage to an electronic component controlled by 0, a plurality of types of voltages can be generated. Specifically, DC 32V for driving the drive motor and solenoid, and DC 12V for driving the variable display device 35 including a liquid crystal panel or the like.
In addition to DC5V, which is the power supply voltage of the command I / F 701, DC18V for driving the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b, and a reference for these DC voltages, and a power supply monitor lamp are lit. It is possible to generate a voltage of NDC 24V.

The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 830 of the power supply device 800 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 710, the video control microcomputer 720, the VDP 730, the tone generator LSI 705, and various control circuits (741 to 744, 707, 708). These are reset. The power supply device 800 uses the general-purpose port of the video control microcomputer 720 to perform VD
It has a function of generating and supplying a reset signal for P730. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 720 and the VDP 730 can be improved.

As described above, the effect control device 700 functions as effect control means for performing effect control based on the command transmitted from the game control device 600, and the display control means for controlling the display content displayed on the variable display device 35. And a function as sound output control means for outputting sound effects and the like from the speaker 10.

The above is the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Next, specific control by the game control device 600 will be described.

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the first half of the main processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the latter half of the main processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The main process is started when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. For example, it is executed when a gaming machine is turned on to start business at a game hall or when a power failure is restored.

When the main process is executed, the game control device 600 first prohibits interruption (step A1001). Next, interrupt vector setting processing for setting a vector address indicating a jump destination executed when an interrupt occurs is executed (step A1002). Furthermore, a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs is set (step A1003). Furthermore, the state of the input port 623 is read (
Step A1004), an interrupt processing mode is set (Step A1005).

Next, the game control device 600 sets a power-on delay timer for waiting until the programs of the subordinate control devices (the payout control device (payout board)) 640 and the effect control device 700 are normally started (step A1006). ). For example, the power-on delay timer is set to wait for 3 seconds. By controlling in this way, when the power is turned on, the game control device 600 is started first and the command is transmitted to the subordinate control device before the start-up of the payout control device 640 and the effect control device 700 is completed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid that the subordinate control device misses the transmitted command. Therefore, the game control device 600 is
When the power is turned on, a standby unit is provided for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control unit (game control device 600) and waiting for the activation of the subordinate control device.

Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the input port 623, and the operation of the initialization switch can be reliably detected by reading the state of the input port 623 before the start of the standby time. In other words, if the status of the initialization switch is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch is continuously operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. There is a need to. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

When the setting of the power-on delay timer is completed, the game control device 600 executes processing for monitoring a power failure (steps A1007 to A1011). The game control device 600
First, the number of power failure monitoring signal checks is set (step A1007). The power failure monitoring signal is checked by reading the power failure monitoring signal output from the power supply device 800.
The number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal is, for example, twice. When a power failure occurs, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on.

Next, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step A1008). Then, the determination in step A1008 is repeated for the number of checks set in the processing in step A1007 (step A1009).

When the game control apparatus 600 has measured that the power failure monitoring signal is ON for the number of checks (the result of step A1009 is “Y”), it determines that a power failure has occurred and the power is shut off. Wait until. In this way, by checking the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined number of checks, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to noise or the like. That is, the game control device 600 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 600 is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a malfunction at power-on.

Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of Step A1009 is “N”), that is, when no power failure has occurred, the game control device 600 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (Step A1010). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the power-on delay timer is 0 (step A1011). If the value of the power-on delay timer is not 0 (the result of step A1011 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not elapsed, the process returns to step A1007.

On the other hand, when the value of the power-on delay timer is 0 (step A1)
If the result of 011 is “Y”), that is, if the standby time has elapsed, RAM or EEPRO
Permit access to read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as M (
Step A1012). Further, all output ports are set to off (no output) (step A1013). In addition, the serial port preinstalled in the gaming microcomputer 611 is set not to be used (step A1014). In the present embodiment, the game control device 6
00 is performing serial communication with the effect control device 700.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the initialization switch signal in the power supply device 800 is set to ON (step A1015). The initialization switch signal is a signal for setting whether or not to start a game in an initialized state when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

For example, if the power is turned off while the store is closed, etc., and the power is turned on when the store opens the next day, the initialization switch signal is set to ON so that the game starts in the initialized state. Is done. On the other hand, when the power is turned on again after a power failure, the initialization switch signal is turned off so that the game machine is not initialized in order to resume the game as close to the gaming state as possible before the power failure. Is set.

When the initialization switch signal is set to OFF (the result of Step A1015 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 checks whether the data in the power failure inspection area in the RWM is normal ( Step A1016, Step A1017). In more detail,
The power outage inspection area includes a power outage inspection area 1 and a power outage inspection area 2. The power failure inspection area 1 stores power failure inspection area check data 1, and the power failure inspection area 2 stores power failure inspection area check data 2. In the process of step A1016, it is determined whether or not the power failure inspection area check data 1 stored in the power failure inspection area 1 is normal. Similarly, step A1017
In this process, it is determined whether or not the power failure inspection area check data 2 stored in the power failure inspection area 2 is normal.

When it is determined that the power failure inspection area check data in the power failure inspection area in the RWM is normal (the results of step A1016 and step A1017 are “Y”)
), A checksum calculation process for calculating verification data called a checksum is executed (
Step A1018).

Then, the game control device 600 compares the checksum value calculated in the checksum calculation process with the checksum value calculated when the power is turned off, and determines whether or not these values match ( Step A1019).

On the other hand, when the initialization switch signal is set to ON (the result of Step A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 600 is not normal (Step A10).
16 or the result of step A1017 is “N”), and the checksum value at the time of power-off does not match the checksum value calculated in step A1018 (step A10).
The result of step 1019 is “N”), and the initialization processing from step A 1040 to step A 1043 in FIG. 46 is executed. Details of the initialization process will be described later.

When the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value at the time of power-off (the result of step A1019 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 has executed the power failure process normally, The initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be converted (step A1020)
. For example, information for determining whether or not the information at the time of power failure has been normally stored is stored in an area (power failure inspection area, checksum, error) in RWM (read / write memory: RAM in the embodiment) Clear the related information and the area for storing information for monitoring fraud).

Next, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the game state at the time of the power failure is a high probability state from an area for storing the game state in the RWM (step A1021). When it is determined that the probability is not high (the result of Step A1021 is “N”), the processing after Step A1024 is executed.

In addition, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of the power outage is a high probability state (the result of Step A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets the high probability notification flag to ON and sets the high probability. Save in the notification flag area (step A1022). Subsequently, the LED of the high probability display unit 57 provided in the collective display device 50 is set to ON (lighted) (step A).
1023).

Furthermore, the game control device 600 transmits a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game process number to the effect control device 700 (step A1024). The special figure game process number is a number indicating the state of the special figure game, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM when a power failure occurs. In this way, by transmitting the power failure recovery command corresponding to the special figure game process number to the effect control device 700, the game can be resumed in a state as close as possible to before the power failure occurs.

Here, a case where the initialization process is executed will be described. As mentioned above, the initialization process is
It is executed when a gaming machine that has been normally powered off is started or when it cannot return to the state before the occurrence of a power failure.

In the initialization process, the game control device 600 first clears all work areas before the access prohibited area (step A1040). Further, the entire stack area after the access prohibited area is cleared (step A1041). Then, the initial value for power-on is saved in the initialized area (step A1042). Further, a command for turning on the power is transmitted to the effect control device 700 (step A1043), and the processes after step A1025 are executed.

Note that the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in step A1024 and step A1043
The command at power-on sent in is a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, special figure 1
2 includes a decorative special figure 1 holding number command and a decorative special figure 2 holding number command, and a probability information command indicating a probability state. In addition, depending on the state when the power is turned off and the power is turned on,
Includes a recovery screen command if a special figure variation display game is running when the power is turned off, a customer waiting demo command if the customer is waiting when the power is turned off, and a power-on command if it is initialized when the power is turned on It is. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included.

When the processing of step A1024 or step A1043 is completed, the gaming control device 600 includes a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 611 (clock generator). Activate (
Step A1025).

The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 611. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 613 and the CTC circuit described above. The timer interrupt signal is a signal for causing the CPU 611a to generate a timer interrupt with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) based on the divided signal. The random number update trigger signal (CTC) is supplied to the random number generation circuit based on the divided signal, and the random number generation circuit serves as a trigger for updating the random number.

When the CTC circuit is activated, the game control device 600 performs activation setting of the random number generation circuit (step A1026). Specifically, the CPU 611a determines a predetermined register (
Processing such as setting a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in the CTC update permission register) is executed. At this time, it may be checked whether the random number generation circuit operates normally.

Furthermore, the game control device 600 uses the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on as the initial values (start values) of the corresponding various initial value random numbers. (Step A1027). Thereafter, the game control device 600 permits an interrupt (step A1028).

Note that the random number generation circuit in the CPU 611a of the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register is changed each time the power is turned on, and initial values of various initial value random numbers are based on the initial value of the soft random number register. By setting a value (start value), it becomes possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to acquire illegal random numbers. Various initial value random numbers include, for example, a random number for determining the jackpot symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, jackpot symbol random number 2), and a random number for determining the hit of the normal variation display game (per random number)
Is included.

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 600 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (step A1029). In the present embodiment, the big hit random number is configured to be generated using a random number generated in the random number generation circuit. That is, the big hit random number is a hard random number generated by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the variation pattern random number are soft random numbers generated by software. In addition,
The generation source of various random numbers is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the big hit random number may be a software random number, or the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the variation pattern random number may be a hardware random number.

Furthermore, after the initial value random number update process is executed, the game control device 600 includes the power supply device 800.
Is set to the number of times of checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the port and read through the port and the data bus (step A1030). Normally, a value of 2 or more is set as the number of checks. It is possible to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred by checking the power failure monitoring signal. The game control device 600 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step A1031). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on, that is, when there is no power failure (the result of Step A1031 is “N”), the initial value random number update processing of Step A1029 is executed again, and the processing from Step A1029 to Step A1031 is performed. Repeated execution (loop processing).

Also, interrupts are permitted (step A) before the initial value random number update process (step A1029).
1028), when a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process,
It is possible to execute interrupt processing with priority. Accordingly, since the timer interrupt process cannot be executed until the execution of the initial value random number update process is completed, it is possible to avoid a shortage of time for executing various processes included in the interrupt process.

In the initial value random number update process (step A1029), the initial value random number update process may be executed by a timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. However, when the initial value random number update process is executed in the timer interrupt process, an interrupt is issued during the initial value random number update process in the main process in order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process in both processes. It is prohibited to release the interrupt after updating the initial random number. However, if the initial value random number update process is not executed in the timer interrupt process and the initial value random number update process is executed only in the main process as in this embodiment, the interrupt can be canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is no problem, and there is an advantage that the main processing is simplified. Further, various random numbers may be updated not in the timer interrupt process but in the main process.

The detection of the occurrence of a power failure (check of the power failure monitoring signal) may be executed by a timer interrupt process. At this time, the detection result may be monitored by the main process, or may be waited until it is reset.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is set to ON (the result of Step A1031 is “Y”), the game control device 600 continuously detects that the power failure monitoring signal is set to ON. Determines whether the number of checks set in the process of step A1030 has been reached (step A1032). If the number of times that the power failure monitoring signal has been set to ON is not reached the number of checks (the result of step A 1032 is “N”).
) Again, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step A1031). That is, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks.

When the number of times that the gaming power monitoring signal is continuously turned on reaches the number of checks (the result of step A 1032 is “Y”), the gaming control device 600 assumes that a power failure has occurred. Executes the process when a power failure occurs (Step A1033 to Step A)
1039).

The game control device 600 prohibits interruption (step A1033) and sets all output ports to off (step A1034). Thereafter, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 1 (step A1035), and further, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 2 (step A1036).

Further, the game control device 600 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off (step A1037), and the calculated checksum value is calculated as the RWM.
Is saved in the checksum area (step A1038). Finally, access to the RWM is prohibited so that the contents of the RWM are not changed (step A1039), and the system waits until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off. In this way, by saving check data in the power failure recovery inspection area and calculating and storing the checksum at the time of power-off, the information stored in the RWM before power-off is correctly backed up. It is possible to determine when the power is turned on again.

[Timer interrupt processing (game control device)]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic (for example, 1 millisecond cycle) timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 611a.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 600 first saves the register by moving the value held in the predetermined register to the RWM (step A1101).
). In this embodiment, a Z80 microcomputer is used as the game microcomputer. Z
The 80-series microcomputer includes a front register and a back register, and the processing in step A1101 can be implemented by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.

Next, the game control device 600 takes in input signals from various sensors and switches inputted via the input unit 620, and executes an input process of reading the state of each input port (step A1102). The various sensors include a first start port switch 601, a second start port switch 602, a conventional gate switch 603, lower count switches 605a to 605m, an upper count switch 606, a first passage detection sensor 607a, and a second passage detection sensor. 607b and the like are included. In the input process, the input information is confirmed by performing chattering removal or the like on the input signal.

Further, the game control device 600 executes output processing for transmitting output data related to game control set in various processes to the effect control device 700 and the payout control device 640 (
Step A1103). The output data is information for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid. The solenoid to be controlled includes, for example, a big prize opening solenoid 2
8. A general electric solenoid 27 is included. The output process also includes a process of outputting game data to an information collecting terminal device (not shown) that collects game data in the gaming machine.

Next, the game control device 600 issues a command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 6.
A payout command transmission process to be transmitted (output) to 40 is executed (step A1104). For example, a prize ball command specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out from the payout device is transmitted.

Further, the game control device 600 executes a random number update process 1 for updating the jackpot symbol random number 1 and the jackpot symbol random number 2 (step A1105), and subsequently the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the special diagram variation display game. Random number update processing 2 is executed (step A1106). In random number update processing 1 and random number update processing 2, in order to give randomness to various random numbers, counters corresponding to various random numbers (big hit random number counter, hit random number counter,
The value of the random number counter for effect determination, etc.) is incremented by one.

After that, the game control device 600 executes a prize opening switch / error monitoring process for monitoring various prize opening switches and the like, and monitoring errors such as unauthorized opening of a frame (step A1107). The various winning opening switches include, for example, a first start opening switch 601, a second starting opening switch 602, a gate switch 603, winning opening switches 604a to 604n, lower count switches 605a to 605m, and upper count switch 606. Winning mouth switch /
In the error monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not a normal signal is input from these switches. As for error monitoring, the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 are targeted for unauthorized opening.

Next, the game control device 600 executes a distribution state process for controlling the operation of the distribution device 90 for determining the number of big hit rounds in the special game state. Details of the distribution state process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, the game control device 600 executes a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game (step A1109). For details of the special figure game process, refer to FIG.
Will be described later. In addition, special figure game processing corresponds to the result of the variable display game to be started,
Two types for normal time and for big hits may be prepared.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes a general game process for performing a process related to the general map variable display game (step A1110).

Next, the game control device 600 executes a segment LED editing process for controlling the display contents of the segment LED for displaying the special figure variation game and various information related to the game (step A1111). Specifically, the parameters for outputting the results of the special map variation display game and the general map variation display game to the segment LED (for example, the collective display device 50) are edited.

The game control device 600 checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 23 and executes a magnet error monitoring process for determining whether or not there is an abnormality (step A1112). Further, the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 24 is checked, and radio wave fraud monitoring processing for determining whether there is an abnormality is executed (step A1113). When the occurrence of an abnormality is detected, a notification sound is output from the speaker 10 or the gaming state notification LED 12 is turned on to notify the outside.

Next, the game control device 600 executes an external information editing process for editing various signals output from the external information terminal 660 (step A1114).

Then, the game control device 600 clears the interrupt request and declares the end of the interrupt (step A1115). Thereafter, the register temporarily saved in the process of step A1101 is restored (step A1116), the interrupt and timer interrupt by the prohibited external device are permitted (step A1117), the timer interrupt process is terminated, and the main process Return to.

[Distribution status update processing]
Next, details of the distribution state update process (step A1108) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In this process, a sorting device 90 disposed in the upper right part of the center frame.
Is switched at a predetermined interval (5 seconds in the present embodiment)
This is a process for outputting the distribution state information to the effect control device 700 as a command. FIG.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the distribution status update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the distribution state has been initialized (step A7001). In the present embodiment, the initial state of the distribution member (switching unit 93) is “fluctuation side”. The game control device 600 determines that the distribution state has been initialized (step A70).
If the result of 01 is “Y”), the processing after step A7007 is executed.

On the other hand, the game control device 600 determines that the distribution state has not been initialized (step A70).
If the result of 01 is “N”), the distribution state initialization process is executed (step A7002). Then, it is determined whether or not initialization has been completed (step A7003). If the initialization is not completed (the result of step A7003 is “N”), in order to make the processing after A7004 wait until initialization of the distribution state of the distribution member (switching unit 93) is completed, The state update process ends.

When the initialization of the switching unit 93 is completed, the game control device 600 (step A7003).
Is "Y"), and a distribution state command corresponding to the initial distribution state is prepared (step A70).
04), command setting processing is executed (step A7005). Further, a switching timer for setting the timing for switching the distribution state is set (step A7006). In this embodiment, the time set for the switching timer is 5 seconds.

Subsequently, if the switching timer is not 0, the game control device 600 updates the timer by −1 (
Step A7007). Then, it is determined whether or not the switching timer has reached 0 (step A
7008). When the switching timer reaches 0 (the result of step A7008 is “Y”),
Since it is the timing for switching the distribution state, the state change of the distribution member (switching unit 93) is set (step A7014), and the switching timer is set to 5 seconds (step A7015).

On the other hand, the game control device 600, when the switching timer is not 0 (step A7
If the result of 008 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the distribution state is being changed (step A700).
9). If the distribution state is not being changed (the result of step A7009 is “N”), the distribution state change has been completed, and thus this processing is terminated.

If the distribution state is being changed (the result of Step A7009 is “Y”), the game control device 600 executes the distribution state change process (Step A7010). Then, it is determined whether or not the distribution state has been changed (step A7011). If the change of the distribution state has not been completed (the result of Step A7011 is “N”), this process ends.

When the change of the distribution state is completed (the result of Step A7011 is “Y”), the game control device 600 prepares a distribution state command corresponding to the changed distribution state (Step A701).
2) A command setting process is executed (step A7013).

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step A1109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special game process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

In the special game process, the first pass gate part (lottery gate) 34g and the second pass gate part (
Fixed gate) 34h monitoring of game balls, monitoring of input signals by the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602, control of the entire process related to the special figure variation display game, special figure (identification pattern, identification information) ) Display settings.

The game control device 600 first executes a passage detection sensor monitoring process for monitoring the passage of the game ball in the first passage gate portion 34g and the second passage gate portion 34h (step A1201). The passage detection sensor monitoring process is a process of extracting and storing a random number for determining a big hit round according to the gate that has passed. Details of the passage detection sensor monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the game control device 600 includes a first start port switch 601 and a second start port switch 60.
The start switch monitoring process for monitoring the second winning is executed (step A1202).

In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins at the first start winning port 37 and the second start winning port 38, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special variable display game based on the win Prior to the start of the game, a game result pre-determination is made to pre-determine a game result based on a prize. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the game control device 600 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A12).
03). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls won by the upper count switch 606 provided in the second special variable winning device 42 and the lower count switches 605a to 605m provided in the first special variable winning device 41 are detected. The number of winning game balls is monitored.

Next, the game control apparatus 600 updates the special figure game process timer by -1 if the special figure game process timer has not already expired (step A1204). Then, it is checked whether or not the special figure game processing timer has expired (step A1205). It should be noted that the special figure game process timer is set with the variation time of the special figure variation display game to be executed as an initial value, and the value of the special figure game process timer is decremented by 1 in the process of step A1204. When the value of the special figure game processing timer becomes 0, it is determined that the time is up. Note that the variation time may be measured by updating the variation control timer only when the variation display game is executed.

When the special game process timer has not expired (the result of Step A1205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 executes the processes after Step A1218.

On the other hand, when the special game processing timer expires (the result of step A1205 is “Y”), the game control device 600 refers to the special game to be branched to the process corresponding to the special game process number. The sequence branch table is set in the register (step A12
06). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired based on the table (step A1207). Then, the return address after the branch process ends is saved in the stack area (step A1208), and the process is branched according to the game process number (step A1209).

When the game process number is “0” (the result of step A1209 is “0”), the game control apparatus 600 executes a special figure routine process (step A1210). The special chart routine process monitors the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the effects, sets the information necessary to execute the special figure fluctuation processing, etc. Do. Details of the special figure routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “1” (the result of step A1209 is “1”), the game control apparatus 600 executes the special figure changing process (step A1211). Processing during special map change
Setting of the stop display time of the identification information in the special figure variation display game, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like are performed. Details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “2” (the result of step A1209 is “2”), the game control apparatus 600 executes a special figure display process (step A1212). The special map display process is
If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, set the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, set the fanfare time according to the big prize opening pattern of each big hit, and perform the fanfare / interval processing To set the information necessary for this. In addition, information necessary for performing the big hit round determination process is set. Details of the special figure display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “3” (the result of step A1209 is “3”), the game control apparatus 600 executes a big hit round determination process (step A1213). The jackpot round determination process is a process for determining a jackpot round when the second special result jackpot occurs. The big hit round is determined based on the values stored in the passage flag storage area and the round random number storage area in the passage detection sensor monitoring process. Details of the big hit round determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “4” (the result of step A1209 is “4”), the game control apparatus 600 executes the fanfare / inter-interval process (step A1214).
. In the fanfare / interval processing, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. Details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “5” (the result of step A1209 is “5”), the game control apparatus 600 executes a special winning opening open process (step A1215). The processing during opening of the big prize opening is necessary to set an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the command of the big hit end screen if the big round is the final round, or to perform the big prize opening remaining ball processing Set information.

When the game process number is “6” (the result of step A1209 is “6”), the game control apparatus 600 executes the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A1216). In the winning ball remaining ball processing, when the big hit round is the final round, the time for the remaining ball in the big winning mouth to be discharged is set, or the information necessary to perform the big hit end processing is set Or

In the winning prize remaining ball process, information necessary for updating the special symbol process timer and performing the fanfare / interval process or the big hit end process is set. In addition, it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed, or a predetermined number (predetermined number) of game balls have been won in the big prize opening, and the opening / closing door 41a is closed when any of the conditions is met. To do. After this is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds, the special figure game process number is set to “7”.

When the game process number is “7” (the result of step A1209 is “7”), the game control device 600 executes a jackpot end process (step A1217). The jackpot end process is
In step A1209, information necessary for performing the special figure routine processing is set. Details of the big hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the game control device 600 prepares a table for controlling the variation of symbols in the collective display device 50 (special display 1 display 51) (step A1218). Subsequently, a symbol variation control process corresponding to the collective display device 50 (special display 1 display 51) is executed (step A12).
19).

Further, the game control device 600 prepares a table for controlling the variation of symbols in the collective display device 50 (special figure 2 display 52) (step A1220). Subsequently, a symbol variation control process corresponding to the collective display device 50 (special figure 2 display 52) is executed (step A12).
21).

[Pass detection sensor monitoring process]
Next, the passage detection sensor monitoring process (step A1201) in the special figure game process described above.
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the passage detection sensor monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

When the passage detection sensor monitoring process is started, the game control device 600 first determines whether or not the first passage detection sensor 607a is turned on, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the first passage gate portion 34g. (Step A7001). When the first passage detection sensor 607a is on (the result of Step A7001 is “Y”), the first passage flag is saved in the passage flag storage area (Step A7002). As described above, the first passing gate part 34g is arranged on the variable side, and is the first in the round number determination game (auxiliary game) executed after the special figure change display game has the second special result. When a game ball passes through the passing gate part 34g, either a round 5 or 15 rounds is performed.

The game control device 600 (when the first passage detection sensor 607a is not turned on (
The result of Step A7001 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the second passage detection sensor 607b is turned on, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the second passage gate portion 34h (Step A7003). If the second passage detection sensor 607b is on (the result of step A7003 is “Y”), the second passage flag is saved in the passage flag storage area (step A7004). As described above, the second passing gate portion 34h is arranged on the fixed side, and the round number determination game (after the special figure variation display game is executed as the second special result)
When a game ball passes through the second passage gate portion 34h in the auxiliary game), the number of big hit rounds is always 10 rounds.

When the first passage detection sensor 607a is not turned on and the second passage detection sensor 607b is not turned on (the result of Step A7003 is “N”), the game control device 600 performs this processing. Exit.

When the game ball passes through either the first pass gate part 34g or the second pass gate part 34h and saves the pass flag in the pass flag storage area, the game control device 600 further extracts a round decision random number, The extracted random number is saved in the round random number storage area (step A7105). Even if a fixed round is selected, a round determination random number is extracted and a lottery of lottery rounds is performed, but only when a variable round is selected, a round determination random number is extracted. It may be.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 determines whether or not a big hit round is being determined (step A7106). The special figure game process number is “
3 ”may be determined. If the game control device 600 is determining the big hit round (the result of step A7106 is “Y”), the game control device 600 ends this processing to determine the big hit round in the big hit round determination processing (step A1213) in the special figure game processing. To do.

On the other hand, when the game control device 600 is not determining the big hit round (step A7).
The result of 106 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a big hit (step A7107). If it is not a big hit (the result of step A7107 is “N”), even though it is not a big hit (for example, waiting for customers, normal gaming state, short-time state, etc.), the player is right-handed Prepare a right-handed warning (left-handed) command (step A7108)
Then, command setting processing is executed (step A7109). When receiving the right-handed warning (left-handed) command, the effect control device 700 displays a warning prompting the user to make a left-handed one. The warning display may be performed on the variable display device 35, but may be performed on the display (hereinafter referred to as “sub display device”) 480 provided in the upper effect device 400 so as not to hinder the effect of the game.

When the current gaming state is a big hit (the result of step A7107 is “Y”), the game control device 600 clears the passage flag storage area and the round random number storage area when the process of step A7109 is completed ( Step A7110). That is, when the big hit round is being determined, the passing flag storage area and the round random number storage area are not cleared.
In the big hit round determination process described later, the number of rounds can be determined based on the values stored in the passage flag storage area and the round random number storage area.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of start port switch monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

When the start port switch monitoring process is started, the game control device 600 first prepares a table for setting information on hold due to winning of a game ball in the first start winning port 37 (step A1301).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes a special-purpose start port switch common process that is executed in common when a game ball has won the first start winning port 37 or the second starting winning port 38 (step A1302). . Details of the special figure start port switch common process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the game control device 600 is connected to an ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device, second start winning port 38).
It is determined whether or not the movable member 38a) is operating, that is, whether or not the movable member 38a of the second start winning opening 38 is open so that a game ball can be won (step A1303). When the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (the result of Step A1303 is “Y”), Step A
The processes after 1305 are executed.

On the other hand, the game control apparatus 600, when the normal electric accessory is not operating (step A13)
If the result of 03 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a public power fraud prize has occurred (step A13).
04).

More specifically, the second power prize winning opening 38 cannot receive a game ball when the movable member 38a is closed, and can receive a game ball only when the movable member 38a is open. Therefore, when a game ball wins in a closed state, there is a high possibility that some abnormality or fraud has occurred,
If there are game balls won in the closed state, the number is counted as an illegal prize. In the process of step A1304, the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is determined as a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (
It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (for example, 5) or more.

The game control device 600 relates to the special figure variation display game as winning or invalidating the game ball to the second start winning opening 38 when the general electric power illegal winning has occurred (the result of Step A1304 is “Y”). The start port switch monitoring process is terminated without executing the process.

On the other hand, the game control device 600, when the ordinary power fraud winning has not occurred (step A1)
The result of 304 is “N”), and a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening 38 is prepared (step A1305), and the special drawing start opening switch common processing is executed (step A13).
06). Thereafter, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (step A1302, step A1306) in the start port switch monitoring process described above will be described. FIG. 52 shows the first of the present invention.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common process of embodiment of this.

The special chart start port switch common processing is when a signal is input from the first start port switch 601 or the second start port switch 602 because the game ball has won the first start winning port 37 or the second start winning port 38. This process is executed in common.

First, the game control device 600 includes a first start port switch 601 and a second start port switch 60.
2, it is checked whether or not a signal is input from a monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 601) (step A 1401). If no signal is input from the monitoring target start port switch (the result of step A1401 is "N"), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated.

On the other hand, when a signal is input from the start port switch to be monitored (the result of step A1401 is “Y”), the game control device 600 has latch data in the random number latch register corresponding to the start port to be monitored. It is determined whether or not a random number has been extracted (
Step A1402). If the random number has not been extracted (the result of step A1402 is “N”), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

When there is latch data in the random number latch register corresponding to the monitored start port (the result of step A1402 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets the start port winning flag corresponding to the monitored start port switch. Saving in a predetermined area of the RWM (step A1403).
Furthermore, the big hit random number extracted to the hard random number latch register corresponding to the monitoring target start port switch is loaded, and preparation for use in the subsequent processing is performed (step A1404).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 outputs the number of times information related to the number of times of winning in the start winning port corresponding to the monitored start port switch is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 1 (start port signal output). Load) (step A1405). Then, it is updated by adding 1 to the loaded value (step A1406), and it is checked whether or not the start port signal output count overflows (step A1407).

When the start port signal output count does not overflow (the result of step A1407 is “N”), the game control device 600 sets the updated start port signal output count value to the RWM start port signal output count area. (Step A1408).

The game control device 600 updates the update target corresponding to the monitored start port switch after the processing of step A1408 is completed or when the start port signal output count overflows (the result of step A1407 is “Y”). It is determined whether or not the number of special figure pending (starting memory) is less than the upper limit value (step A1409).

When the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit value (the result of step A1409 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets information corresponding to the winning detected by the start port switch. Specifically, first, 1 is added to the number of special figure reservations to be updated (for example, the number of special figure 1 reservations) and updated (
Step A1410).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 prepares a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number (step A1411). The decoration special figure reservation number command is composed of a MODE part and an ACTION part. At this time, the prefetch result corresponding to the newly generated start memory may be transmitted together with the decoration special figure hold number command. For example, a value indicating the prefetching result may be added to the ACTION part of the decoration special figure reservation number command.

More specifically, the game control device 600 first prepares a decoration special figure hold number command (MODE) for the start port switch to be monitored, and further displays a decoration special figure hold number command ( ACTION) is prepared. Then, a command setting process for setting the prepared special figure reservation number command is executed (step A1412).

Next, the game control device 600 calculates the address of the random number save area corresponding to the updated special figure hold number (step A1413). Then, the big hit random number acquired in the process of step A1404 is saved in the big hit random number save area of the RWM (step A1414). Further, a jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A).
1415). Thereafter, the prepared jackpot symbol random number is saved in the RWM jackpot symbol random number saving area (step A1416).

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 600 extracts a variation pattern random number, and saves the extracted value in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A1417). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage areas. The variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are used, for example, for individually setting the variation patterns of the first half and the second half, or for executing a specific effect.

Fluctuation pattern random numbers (variation patterns 1 to 3) for determining a variation pattern in the first or second special figure variation display game (including the execution time of the variation display game in variation display without various reach and reach), Unlike the big hit symbol random number which is updated by the software of the random number generation circuit, it is updated by the game control program. Note that the update of the variation pattern random number is not limited to being performed by the game control program, but may be performed by hardware or software of the random number generation circuit.

Then, the game control device 600 loads a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the monitored start port switch saved in the RWM in the process of step A1416, and executes the special figure hold information determination process (step A1418). For details of the special figure hold information determination process, refer to FIG.
Will be described later. Then, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of special figure hold is not less than the upper limit value, the game control device 600 (step A1)
The result of 409 is “N”), a special figure reservation number command (hold overflow command) is prepared (step A1419), and command setting processing is executed (step A1420). Then, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A1418) in the special figure start port switch common process (FIG. 52) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure hold information determination processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information (game result information) corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on each start memory.

The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the pre-reading effect (notice) execution condition is satisfied (step A1501). The execution condition of the pre-reading effect is, for example, that when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 37, there is no general power support and it is not in the special game state. Further, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 38, the execution condition for the prefetch effect is always satisfied. In the case of the normal gaming state, it is also determined that the condition for transmitting the prefetch prohibition command, that is, the condition for executing the prefetch effect is not satisfied even when the number of executions of the variable display game is less than 8 after the power failure is restored. Also good. If the execution condition for the prefetch effect is not satisfied (the result of step A1501 is “N”), the game control device 600 ends the special figure hold information determination process.

In addition, when the result of the normal map display game is a win in the normal gaming state (non-electric support state), the public member short opening that the movable member 38a opens for a short time with a probability of 4/5, or 1 / In the specification in which the normal power long open, in which the movable member 38a is opened for a long time (0.5 + 5 seconds) with a 5-probability, is selected, the pre-reading is not performed for the start-up memory in FIG. Pre-reading may be performed for the start-up memory of the special figure 2 that was won when the public electric long opening occurred.

On the other hand, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the newly stored start memory is a big hit when the execution condition of the prefetch effect is satisfied (the result of step A1501 is “Y”). Processing is executed (step A1502). The big hit determination process determines whether or not the result of the variable display game related to the start memory is a big hit by determining whether or not the big hit random number value included in the pending start memory matches the big hit determination value. judge.

The game control device 600 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process in step A1502 is a jackpot (step A1503). If the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (the result of step A1503 is “N”), the stoppage stop symbol pattern is set as the stop symbol pattern (step A1506). And the process after step A1507 is performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (the result of step A1503 is “
Y "), the game control device 600 sets the jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the winning start port as a table for specifying the symbol for identifying the jackpot (step A150).
4). In the jackpot symbol random number check table, a determination value of a random number indicating a distribution rate of whether or not the jackpot is hit and a jackpot stop symbol pattern corresponding to the determination value are defined.

Further, the game control device 600 checks the jackpot symbol random number from the jackpot symbol random number check table set in the process of step A1504, and acquires and sets the corresponding jackpot symbol stop symbol pattern (step A1505).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 saves the jackpot stop symbol pattern set in the process of Step A1505 or the loss stop symbol pattern set in the process of Step A1506 in the prefetch stop symbol stop pattern area (Step A1507). Further, a pre-read symbol command corresponding to the target start switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A1508).
), Command setting processing is executed (step A1509).

Next, the game control device 600 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information set for the monitoring target start port (step A1510). Details of the special figure information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 prepares the latter half variation pattern setting information table corresponding to the start target to be monitored in order to set the latter half variation pattern among the variation modes in the special figure variation display game (step A1510). Then, the variation pattern setting process for setting the entire variation pattern is executed (step A1511). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Note that a variation pattern setting process may be defined for each result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and a corresponding fluctuation pattern setting process may be executed according to the result of the target special figure fluctuation display game.

Finally, the game control device 600 prepares a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first and second variation numbers set in the variation pattern setting process (step A1513).
Command setting processing is executed (step A1514). Thereafter, the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.

As described above, in the special figure hold information determination process, before executing the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is acquired and notified to the effect control device 700. Is possible. The effect control device 700 changes the display mode of the start-up memory display displayed on the variation display device 35, for example, and gives the player the result of the special diagram variation display game before the start timing of the special diagram variation display game. Is notified. Here, the game control device 600
Functions as a prior determination means, and the production control device 700 functions as a prior notification means.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A1210) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure routine processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (step A1601). Further, when the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (step A16)
The result of 01 is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the first start memory number (special figure 1 hold number) is 0 (
Step A1606). Thus, by performing the special figure 2 hold number check (step A1601) before the special figure 1 hold number check (step A1606), it is more advantageous for the player than the first special figure fluctuation display game. The second special figure fluctuation display game is preferentially executed.

When the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of step A1601 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 prepares a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (step A16).
02) A command setting process is executed (step A1603). Furthermore, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process for executing the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (step A1604). Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thereafter, the game control device 600 executes a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) for preparing a table (for the second special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process (step A1605).
The special figure routine processing ends. Details of the special figure changing process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, the game control device 600, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step A1606)
Is "N"), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A1607), and command setting processing is executed (step A1608). Furthermore, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for executing the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (step A1609). Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the game control device 600 executes a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) for preparing a table (for the first special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process (step A1610).
The special figure routine processing ends. Details of the special figure changing process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

It should be noted that the decoration special figure hold number command may be transmitted to the effect control apparatus 700 only when the hold number changes.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of step A1606 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A1611).
). If the customer waiting demonstration is not started, that is, not started (step A16)
11 is “N”), a customer waiting demo flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A1612). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A1613), and a command setting process is executed (step A1614).

On the other hand, the game control device 600 has already started the customer waiting demonstration (step A).
Since the result of 1606 is “Y”), since the customer waiting demo flag is already set in the customer waiting demo flag area, and the customer waiting demo command has already been transmitted to the effect control device 700, step A1.
Processes after 615 are executed.

Finally, the game control device 600 executes the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 for preparing a table for shifting to the special figure normal process (step A1615). Specifically, a process of setting a processing number “0” corresponding to the special figure routine processing, a flag (big prize opening fraud monitoring information) for defining a big prize opening fraud monitoring period, and the like in the table is executed. Thereafter, the special figure routine processing is terminated.

[Special figure change start processing]
Next, details of the special figure change start process (step A1604, step A1609) in the special figure ordinary process described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55A shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. , (B) is a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game. First, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described.

The game control device 600 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag (fluctuating flag) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area of the RWM (step A1701). Next, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting the big hit flag 1 when the result of the first special figure variation display game corresponding to the earliest start memory is a big hit is executed (step A1702).

Next, the game control device 600 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process corresponding to the setting of the first special figure stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol) (step A1703). Details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information (step A1708). Details of the special figure information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, the game control device 600 prepares a special figure 1 pattern setting information table for setting information related to the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) for the special figure 1 based on the random number stored as the start memory (step A1705). . Subsequently, a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is executed (step A1706). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Finally, the game control device 600 executes a change start information setting process for setting information for starting the first special figure change display game (step A1707), and ends the special figure 1 change start process. Details of the change start information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Moreover, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A1609) shown in (B) is the same procedure as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and a process corresponding to special figure 2 is executed instead of special figure 1.

Next, the special figure stop symbol setting process (step A1703) in the special figure fluctuation start process described above.
Step A1713) will be described in detail. FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 57 shows the first of the present invention.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of embodiment of this.

First, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is set, that is, whether or not the result of the target first special figure variation display game is a big hit (step A1801a).
. When the big hit flag 1 is set (the result of step A1801a is “Y”),
Random numbers are loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area corresponding to the number of holdings 1, that is, the start-up memory where the fluctuation starts (step A1802a). Further, a jackpot symbol table for special figure 1 is set as a table for determining a stop symbol (step A1803a).
.

Next, the game control apparatus 600 acquires the stop symbol number corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number acquired by the process of step A1802a from the jackpot symbol table for special figure 1 set by the process of step A1803a, and acquires the stop symbol acquired. The number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A1804a).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 sets a jackpot stop symbol information table corresponding to the current gaming state (step A1805a). Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired from the jackpot stop symbol information table and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A1806a). Furthermore, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired,
Save in the probability variation determination flag area (step A1807a).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not set (the result of Step A1801a is “N”), the game control device 600 acquires the stop symbol number at the time of loss, and stops the acquired stop symbol number as the special symbol 1 stop. Save in the symbol area (step A1808a). Further, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A1809).
a).

When the process of step A1807a or step A1809a is completed, the game control device 6
00 corresponds to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special figure command table, and prepares a special decoration figure 1 command comprising the ACTION part and the MODE part (step A1810a). further,
The decoration special figure command acquired by the process of step A1810a is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A1811a), and the command setting process is executed (step A1812).
a).

Furthermore, the game control device 600 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A1813a). Finally, the jackpot symbol random number saving area for special figure 1 is cleared to 0 (step A1814a). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

Also, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 57 is executed in the same manner as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process because the process corresponding to the special figure 2 is executed instead of the special figure 1, and the description is omitted. To do.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (step A1704, step A1714) in the special figure fluctuation start process described above will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure information setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the game state is a time-short state (step A1901). If it is not the time saving state (the result of Step A1901 is “N”), a normal variation pattern selection group information table is set (Step A1902). On the other hand, if the time is short (the result of step A1901 is “Y”), the time variation variable pattern selection group information table is set (step A1903).

When the variation pattern selection group information table is set, the game control device 600 loads the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag from the set variation pattern selection group information table (step A1904). Further, the fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure hold number is acquired and saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step A1905).

As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of special figure (figure 1 or special figure 2) that starts fluctuation.
Then, the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the number-of-holds information, which is information related to the number of starting memories for the type of the special figure, and the game state information including information about whether or not the time is short is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is used to select a fluctuation group later.

A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, first select the variation group, and then select one variation pattern from the variation group. It has become. When selecting one fluctuation pattern, another new random number may be acquired.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 sets a distribution base pointer table (step A1).
906), a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A19).
07). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired distribution base pointer (step A
1908), the value after addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A1909), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.

Thereby, the variable distribution information 2 acquired based on the stop symbol pattern information and the effect mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to select a fluctuation group later. In addition, as for the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the short-time state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the variation pattern setting process (step A1706 in the special figure variation start process described above).
Step A1716) will be described in detail. FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of variation pattern setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

When the variation pattern setting process is started, the game control device 600 first sets the variation group selection address table (step A2001), and acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2. (Step A2002).

Then, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the effect mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step A2003). If the effect mode number is not less than 2 (the result of Step A2003 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (Step A2004). If the stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (the result of step A2004 is “N”), the variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holdings 1) and prepared. (Step A
2007).

On the other hand, game control device 600, when the production mode number is less than 2 (step A200
3 result is “Y”), or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (the result of step A2004 is “Y”), the variable distribution is prepared from the latter half variation group table prepared in the process of step A2002. The address of the table corresponding to information 1 is acquired (step A2005). Next, prepare the acquired address as the address of the second-half variable group (
Step A2006), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (Step A2007).

In addition, when the production mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuous stop symbol pattern, the address is also taken into account the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information that is information related to the start memory number Thus, the variation pattern selection mode is made different depending on the number of start memories.

Thereafter, the game control device 600 executes a 2-byte distribution process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1 (step A2008). The address of the latter half variation selection table selected by the 2-byte distribution process is acquired and prepared (step A2009). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the holding number 1) and prepared (step A2010).

Further, the game control device 600 executes a distribution process for selecting the latter half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 (step A2011). Then, the latter half variation number selected by the distribution process is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A2012). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 600 sets the first half variation group table (step A201).
3) A table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the fluctuation distribution information 2 (including the determined second half fluctuation number) (step A2014). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A2015), and a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A2016). ).

After that, the game control device 600 executes a sorting process for selecting the first variation pattern (first variation number) of the special figure variation display game from the first variation selection table (first variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3 ( Step A2017). Then, the first variation number selected by the distribution process is acquired and saved in the first variation number area (step A20).
18) The variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the change start information setting process (step A1707) in the special figure change start process described above.
Step A1717) will be described in detail. FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of change start information setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

When the variation start information setting process is started, the game control device 600 first clears the random number storage areas of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (step A2101). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A2102), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A2103). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A2104), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A210).
5).

Then, the game control device 600 adds the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value (step A2106), and saves the addition value in the special figure game processing timer area (step A2107).
. Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A21).
08) and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the latter half variation number (step A).
2109), command setting processing is performed (step A2110).

Next, the game control device 600 updates the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag by −1 (step A2111), and sets the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (step A2112). Further, the random number storage area is shifted (step A2113).
The shifted free area is cleared to 0 (step A2114).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 first clears the stop extension information area as a process related to extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure change display game (step A2115). The stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (the result of step A2116 is “Y”), the effect mode number is 3 (the result of step A2117 is “Y”), and the remaining number of rotations in the effect mode ( If the number of games is 1, (the result of step A2118 is “
Y "), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step A2119).

The game control device 600 determines that the result of step A2119 is “
N "), the stop extension information 1 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A2120), a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step A2122), command setting processing (step A2123) is performed, and The start information setting process ends. Thereby, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extended stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time).

Further, when the special control probability is high (the result of Step A2119 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 saves the stop extension information 2 in the stop extension information area (Step A2121).
. Then, a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step A2122),
Command setting processing is executed (step A2123). Thereafter, the variation start information setting process is terminated. Due to this, the special time extension display time 2 in which the stop time is longer than the normal special figure display time 2
(Second extended stop time) is set.

On the other hand, the game control device 600 determines that the stop symbol pattern is not a stop symbol pattern (the result of step A2116 is “N”), and the effect mode number is not three (step A2).
If the result of 117 is “N”) or the remaining number of rotations (game number) in effect mode 2 is not 1 (the result of step A2118 is “N”), the variation start information setting process is terminated. In this case, the stop time extension is not set and the normal stop time is set.

In this way, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the specific rotation speed, and the state of the production mode. It has come to be. Thereby, for example, it is possible to set an effect that is continuous between the variation time and the stop time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 600 serves as determination means for determining various random values stored in the start storage means (game control device 600). In addition, the game control device 600 constitutes a variation pattern determining means that can determine the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 700, and the effect control device 700 has the variation pattern determined based on the reception of the information related to the start of the special figure variation display game. Correspondingly, the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to the extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 700 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 700 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process]
Next, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A160) in the special figure usual process described above.
5. Details of step A1610) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 61 (A) shows the case of the first special-figure change display game, and FIG. This is the case of the special figure variation display game. First, the case of the first special figure variation display game will be described.

The game control device 600 first sets “1” as the process number (step A2201).
The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A2202).

Then, the game control device 600 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (step A220).
3) Save the signal related to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (step A2204). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A2205), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A2206). Thereafter, the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

The procedure for the second special figure variation display game shown in (B) is the same as that for the first special figure variation display game, and processing corresponding to special figure 2 is executed instead of special figure 1. Is done.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step A1211) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure changing processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control apparatus 600 first determines whether or not there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step A2301). If there is no stop extension information (the result of step A2301 is “N”), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A2302). Then, the special figure display process transition setting process is executed (step A2306), and the special figure display process is terminated.

In addition, when there is stop extension information (the result of Step A2301 is “Y”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not it is stop extension information 1 (Step A2303). If it is the stop extension information 1 (the result of step A2303 is “Y”), the special figure extension display time 1 (
For example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A2304).
. Then, the special figure display process transition setting process is executed (step A2306), and the special figure display process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game control device 600 is not the stop extension information 1 (the result of Step A2303 is “N”), that is, when it is the stop extension information 2, the special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14
300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A2305). Then, the special figure display process transition setting process is executed (step A2306), and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 600 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
Next, the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step A23) in the special figure fluctuating process described above.
The details of (06) will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure display processing transition setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the game control device 600 sets a process number “2” corresponding to the special figure display process (step A2401), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A24).
02).

Next, the game control device 600 saves a signal related to the end of fluctuation in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (step A2403, step A2404), and the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. The control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area corresponding to the number of times of execution (step A2405).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag as information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51. Save in the area (step A2406). Further, as information for controlling the second special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A2407), the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A1212) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure display processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first loads the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A2501), and clears the RWM big hit flag 2 area (step A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A2503).

When the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of step A2503 is “Y”), the game control device 600 clears the RWM jackpot flag 1 area (step A).
2508). Then, the test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A2509).

On the other hand, when the loaded jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot, the game control device 600 (
The result of step A2503 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A2504), and the big hit flag 1 area of the RWM is cleared (step A2505). ). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A2506).

When the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, the game control device 600 (step A2506).
If the result is "Y"), the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A2507).

When the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is a big hit, the game control device 600 acquires the stop symbol number from the stop symbol area (step A2510). And it is determined whether it is a stop symbol number (first special result probability variation big hit) that the number of rounds of big hit is fixed (step A2511).
). If the number of rounds is not a fixed symbol number (the result of step A2511 is “N
)), That is, if it is a stop symbol number (the second special result normal big hit and the second special result probability variable big hit) that can select the number of big hit rounds, the big hit round determination process transition setting process is executed (step A2512). Thereafter, the special figure displaying process is terminated. Details of the big hit round determination process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the case of a stopped symbol number in which the number of rounds is fixed (the result of Step A2511 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 prepares a fixed round number upper limit (16 rounds) (Step A2513). . Then, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is executed (step A2514), and then the special figure display process is terminated. Details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the game control device 600, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (step A2
The result of 506 is “N”), an effect mode information check process related to the setting of the effect mode is executed (step A2516), and a time-reduced change frequency update process for managing the number of executions of the special-figure variable display game to be in a short time state is executed. Is executed (step A2517). Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process is executed (step A2517), and then the special figure display process is terminated. Note that the number of executions in the short-time state may be managed at the start of the change.

[Big hit round decision process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit round determination process transition setting process (step A2512) in the special figure display process described above will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a big hit round determination process transition setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control apparatus 600 first sets “3” as the process number (step A7201).
The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A7202).

Then, the game control device 600 prepares a round decision start command (step A72
03), command setting processing is executed (step A7204). Thereafter, the big hit round determination process transition setting process is terminated. The round determination start command is a command for notifying the effect control device 700 that lottery of the number of rounds of the big hit round will be performed. When receiving the round determination start command, the effect control device 700 starts the effect of determining the big hit round.

[Big hit round decision processing]
Next, the big hit round decision processing (step A1213 in the special figure game processing described above)
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot round determination processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first loads the passage flag set in the passage flag storage area in the passage detection sensor monitoring process (FIG. 50) (step A7301) and determines whether or not the passage flag is set (step S7301). A7302). If the passage flag is not set (the result of step A7302 is “N”), it is not necessary to determine the big hit round, and the big hit round determination process is terminated.

When the passage flag is set (the result of Step A7302 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 determines whether or not the set passage flag is the first (variable) passage flag ( Step A7303). In the case of the first (fluctuation) passing flag (step A730)
The result of 3 is “Y”), and the round distribution table 1 (FIG. 41C) in which 5 rounds or 15 rounds are selected on a one-to-one basis is set (step A2704). On the other hand, when it is not the first (variation) passage flag (the result of step A7303 is “N”), that is, when the second (fixed) passage flag is set, the round distribution table in which 10 rounds are selected. 2 (
FIG. 41D is set (step A2705). Note that a plurality of round numbers may be set in the round distribution table 2 so that the expected value (average value) of the execution rounds is 10 rounds.

When the round distribution table is set, the game control device 600 loads the round determination random number set in the passage detection sensor monitoring process from the round random number storage area (step A).
2706). Furthermore, based on the loaded round determination random number, the corresponding round number is acquired from the set round distribution table (step A2707).

Further, the game control device 600 prepares a round number determination command corresponding to the acquired round number (step A2708), and executes command setting processing (step A2709).
). Further, a round number upper limit value (5 rounds, 10 rounds, or 15 rounds) corresponding to the acquired round number is prepared (step A2710), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is executed (step A2514). . Thereafter, the special figure displaying process is terminated. Details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the fanfare / in the special figure display processing and jackpot round determination processing described above.
Details of the inter-interval process transition setting process 1 (step A2514, step A7311) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing a procedure of fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first acquires the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information and saves it in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A2801). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LE of the RWM is obtained.
Save in the D pointer area (step A2802). Thereby, the round number display section 59
The number of rounds per jackpot is displayed.

Next, the game control device 600 sends an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern to the RWM.
Is prepared by loading from the decoration special figure command area (step A2803), and command setting processing is executed (step A2804). After that, a probability information command corresponding to information for setting the probability of a hit result in the normal map variable display game and the special map variable display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A2805), and command setting processing is performed. Execute (Step A
2806).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process (step A2807). A setting process is executed (step A2808).

Next, the game control device 600 saves in the external information output data area of the RWM the prize winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game. (Step A2809). Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the special game process timer area (step A2810).

Then, the game control device 600 clears the large winning opening illegal prize number area of the large winning opening (the first special variable winning apparatus 41 or the second special variable winning apparatus 42) corresponding to the large winning opening information (
Step A2811). Further, a fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the big winning opening information (step A2812).

Next, the game control device 600 loads a special game mode flag (step A281).
3) The loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A2).
814). Thereby, the information on the production mode when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 sets “4”, which is a process number corresponding to the fanfare / interval process (step A2815), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (step A2816).

Next, the game control device 600 saves a signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) in the external information output data area (step A2817), and a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state in the test signal output data area. Save (step A2818).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 clears the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state (step A2819), and saves the low probability number in the gaming state display number area (step A2820). . Further, a flag for normal figure low probability & no support for ordinary call is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A2821).

Then, the game control device 600 clears the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A28).
22) Further, the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 59) corresponding to the display of the high probability state (step A2823).
Then, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A2824).

Next, the game control device 600 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 700 at the time of power failure recovery (step A2825), and executes it in a short time state. The time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of possible special figure variation display games is cleared (step A2826). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and a normal probability state and a normal operation state are obtained.

Thereafter, the game control device 600 saves the number of the effect mode 1 in the effect mode number area (step A2827), and clears the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A2828). Then, the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A2829), and further, the effect mode 1 command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A283).
0). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the effect mode information check process (step A25) in the special figure display process described above.
Details of 15) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the effect mode information check process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A2901). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of step A2901 is “Y”), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, for example, when the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. It is.

In addition, when the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (the result of step A2901 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 has an effect remaining that is the number of times that the special figure variable display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed. The number of revolutions is updated by -1 (step A2902). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect has become 0 (step A2903).

When the remaining number of rotations of the effect becomes 0 (the result of step A2903 is “Y”), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 600 has the effect mode information address. A table is set (step A2904), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A2905).

Then, the game control apparatus 600 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred and saves it in the effect mode number area (step A2906), acquires the effect remaining speed of the effect mode to be transferred, and acquires the effect remaining speed area. (Step A2907). Further, the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A2908).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 prepares a command corresponding to the new effect mode number (
Step A2909), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (Step A2).
910). Thereafter, a command setting process is executed (step A2911), and the effect mode information check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 600 determines that the remaining production speed is not 0 (the result of step A2903 is “N”), that is, when the current production mode continues in the next special figure variation display game. It is determined whether the rotational speed is a specified rotational speed (for example, 8 times) (step A2912).

The game control device 600 determines that the remaining production rotation speed is not the specified rotation speed (step A29).
12 is “N”), the effect mode information check process is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (the result of step A2912 is “Y”), an effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A2913), and command setting processing is executed (step A).
2914). Thereafter, the effect mode information check process ends. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode.

Since the game control device 600 manages the production mode as described above, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the time shortening fluctuation number update process (step A251) in the special figure display process described above.
Details of 6) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the time shortening variation number update process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (
Step A3001). If the special figure has a high probability (the result of step A3001 is “Y
]), The time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the special figure time is short (short time state) when the special figure high probability is not in effect (the result of step A3001 is “N”) (step A3002).
. If the special drawing time is not short (the result of step A3002 is “N”), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. If the special drawing time is short (the result of step A3002 is “
Y "), the time reduction fluctuation count for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the short time state-
1 is updated (step A3003), and it is determined whether or not the number of time-change fluctuations is 0 (step A3004).

When the time reduction variation count is not 0 (the result of step A3004 is “N”), that is, when the time-short state continues in the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 600 updates the time reduction variation count processing. Exit. In addition, when the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (step A
If the result of 3004 is “Y”), that is, if the time-short state ends in the current special figure variation display game, a probability information command (time-short end) is prepared (step A3005), and command setting processing is executed (step A3005). Step A3006). Thereafter, a time-shortening end setting process is executed (step A3007), and the time-reduced variation number updating process is terminated.

[Time-saving end setting processing]
Next, the time reduction end setting process (step A30) in the time reduction variation number update process described above.
The details of (07) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart illustrating a procedure for time-shutdown setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control apparatus 600 first saves a signal related to the end of time reduction in the external information output data area (step A3101), and further saves a signal related to the end of time reduction in the test signal output data area (step A3102).

Next, the game control device 600 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (step A3103), and saves the ordinary low probability & no power support flag in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A3103). A3104). Further, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A3105), and a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A3106). The normal process transition setting process 2 (at the time saving end) is terminated.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A1217) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot end processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the game control device 600 is set when the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high probability data (step A3201).

If the game control device 600 is not high probability data (the result of step A3201 is “
N "), the jackpot end setting process 1 is executed (step A3202). On the other hand, if the data is high probability data (the result of step A3201 is “Y”), the jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (step A3203).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag (step A3204), and executes a command setting process (step A3205).
.

Next, the game control device 600 first sets an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in order to save information necessary for managing the effect mode (step A3).
206). Then, with reference to the set production mode information setting table, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (step A3207). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A3208), and the next mode transition to the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is performed. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A3209).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 prepares a command corresponding to the new effect mode number (
In step A3210), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A32).
11) A command setting process is executed (step A3212). Finally, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is executed (step A3213), and the jackpot end process ends.

[Big jackpot end setting processing]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A3202) in the jackpot end process described above
The details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A3203) will be described. FIG.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (
A) shows the jackpot end setting process 1, and (B) shows the jackpot end setting process 2.

First, the jackpot end setting process 1 will be described. First, the game control device 600 saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the external information output data area (step A3301), and saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the test signal output data area (step A3302).

Next, the game control device 600 saves the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A3303), and saves the special figure low probability & hourly flag in the special figure game mode flag area. (Step A 3304). After that, the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A3305), the initial value (eg, 70) of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A3306), and the big hit ends The setting process 1 ends.

By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 70) of the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state ends when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (eg, 70 times).

Subsequently, the jackpot end setting process 2 will be described. First, the game control apparatus 600 saves a signal related to the start of high probability in the external information output data area (step A3311), and saves a signal related to the start of high probability in the test signal output data area (step A3312).
.

Next, the game control device 600 saves the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A3313), and saves the special figure high probability & hourly flag in the special figure game mode flag area. (Step A3314). Thereafter, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A3315), the time reduction variation frequency area is cleared (step A3316), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended.

With the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived. In other words, after the special game state ends, the game control device 600 has a specific game state (short-time state) that extends a period during which the movable member 38a of the second start winning prize port 38 is opened for a predetermined period. It is a specific game state generation control means that can be generated.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A32) in the jackpot end process described above.
Details of 13) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing a procedure for a big hit end setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the game control device 600 sets “0” as the process number corresponding to the special figure routine process (step A3401), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A).
3402).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 saves a signal related to the end of the big hit in the external information output data area (step A3403), and saves a signal related to the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (step A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 clears the information in the probability variation determination flag area (step A3405), and clears the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds (step A3406). Further, the number in the time zone is saved in the game state display number area (step A3407).

Then, the game control apparatus 600 saves the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A3408). Finally, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A3409), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is terminated.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (step A1219, step A1221) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the symbol variation control process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The symbol variation control process is the first special figure or second
This is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as special symbols and setting the display data of special symbols.

The game control device 600 first checks whether the special figure fluctuation control flag corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing among the first special figure and the second special figure. (Step A
3501), it is determined whether or not it is changing (step A3502).

When the special figure changing flag is changing (the result of step A3502 is “Y”), the game control device 600 displays a symbol corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure). A table (for variation) is acquired (step A3503). In the first special figure and the second special figure, the blinking control timer corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by −1 (
Step A3504), it is determined whether or not the timer value is 0, that is, the time is up (Step A3505).

When the value of the blinking control timer is 0, the game control device 600 (step A3505).
Result in “Y”), the initial value of the blinking control timer is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (
Step A3506), among the first special figure and the second special figure, the variable symbol number corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step A3507).

Also, the game control device 600 corresponds to the value of the target variation symbol number area after the processing of step A3507 or when the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (the result of step A3505 is “N”). Display data to be acquired is acquired (step A3508). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A3511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing, the game control device 600 (step A).
The result of 3502 is “N”), and a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step A3509). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step A3510). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A3511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

By the above processing, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. The Rukoto.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step A1112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 23, and fraud notification is started or ended.

First, the game control device 600 determines whether or not abnormal magnetism has been detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 23 and taken into the input port 622a (step A3601). When the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor 23) is on (step A3601)
Is "Y"), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for counting the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step A3602), and whether or not the timer has timed out Is determined (step A3603).

The game control device 600 determines that the magnet fraud monitoring timer has expired (step A36).
If the result of 03 is “Y”), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step A3604). Further, the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step A3605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step A3606), and a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step A3607).

Furthermore, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step A3613). That is, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 23 is continuously on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions).

On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor 23) is not on (the result of step A3601 is “N”), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the game control device 600 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer. (Step A3608).

Further, the game control device 600 determines that the magnet fraud notification time is determined after the processing of step A3608 is completed or when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (the result of step A3603 is “N”). If the fraud notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step A3610).

When the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step A3610)
Is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of step A3610 is “Y
”), That is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the period of fraudulent notification has ended or when fraudulent notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared. (Step A3611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step A3612), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step A3613).

Then, the game control apparatus 600, when the magnet fraud flag prepared in the process of step A3607 or step A3612 matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step A36).
13 is “Y”), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if the values do not match (
The result of step A3613 is “N”), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step A3614), and command setting processing is executed (step A3615).
. Thereafter, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step A1113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of radio wave fraud monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 24, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

The game control device 600 first turns on the radio wave sensor 24 from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 24 and taken into the input port 622a via the proximity I / F 621a.
That is, it is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step A3701).
When the radio wave sensor is on (result of step A3701 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step A3702).

Further, game control device 600 prepares a radio wave fraud notification command (step A370).
3) A radio wave fraud occurrence flag is set as the radio wave fraud flag (step A3704).

On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of step A3701 is “N”), that is, when no abnormal radio wave is detected, the game control device 600 determines the radio wave fraud notification that defines the radio wave fraud notification time. If the timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero.

Then, game control device 600 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step A3706). If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of step A3706 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, game control device 600, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step A3
If the result of 706 is “Y”), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired and the period of fraudulent notification has ended or if fraudulent notification has not been performed from the beginning, radio fraud A notification termination command is prepared (step A3707), and a radio wave fraud cancel flag is set as a radio wave fraud flag (step A3708).

When the radio wave fraud flag is set in the process of step A3704 or step A3708,
The game control apparatus 600 determines whether or not the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (step A3709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

When the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (the result of step A3709 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 ends the radio fraud monitoring process. on the other hand,
If the values do not match (the result of step A3709 is “N”), the prepared radio fraud flag is saved in the radio fraud flag area (step A3710), and command setting processing is executed (step A3711). Thereafter, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

The above is description of the process performed with the game control apparatus 600 (main board | substrate). continue,
The effect control executed based on the command received from the game control device 600 will be described. The effect control is executed by the effect control device 700 (sub board).

[1st CPU main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main process executed by the effect control device 700 will be described. FIG. 77 is a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) of the effect control device 700 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
710 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of main processing executed by 710. The main process is executed when the gaming machine 1 is turned on.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 prohibits interruption (step B1001). next,
Various initialization processes are executed (step B1003). Specifically, the RAM that is the work area
711 is cleared to 0 and CPU initialization processing is executed. Further, initial values necessary for executing various processes are set in the RAM 711 and a random number initialization process is executed.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 activates various interrupt timers for generating an interrupt at a predetermined timing (for example, 1 millisecond) (step B1003) and permits the interrupt (step B1004). Interrupt processing such as receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 600 at the occurrence timing of the interrupt is executed. Details of the interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main control microcomputer 710 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (step B1005). WDT is activated by the CPU initialization process included in the initialization process described above,
It monitors whether the CPU is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU is reset.

Then, the main control microcomputer 710 displays the effect button 17 (selection button 29) by the player.
An effect button input process for generating the detected signal (input information) is executed (step B1006). Also, a game control command analysis process for analyzing and specifying the game control command received from the game control device 600 is executed (step B1007). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command has been correctly received in the reception buffer by the interruption, and if it is received, the command is classified for use in the 1st scene control process (step B1009) or the like. To do.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes test mode processing (step B1008).
). In the test mode process, an inspection command is received at the time of inspection at the time of shipment from the factory, and LED lighting or the like is inspected. Therefore, the test mode process is executed when the CPU is inspected at the time of factory shipment. If processing such as display, audio output, and light emission is actually required, sound control processing (step B1012), decoration control processing (step B1013), which will be described later,
Processing is performed in a motor / solenoid (SOL) control process (step B1014).

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 performs game control command analysis processing (step B1007).
) Based on the control command analyzed in the above, the variable display device (hereinafter “main display device”)
) 35 or 1st scene control processing for controlling the scene (display contents) to be displayed on the sub display device 480 is executed (step B1009). In the 1st scene control process, a scene related to the progress of the game is controlled. Details of the 1st scene control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a gaming machine error monitoring process for monitoring the occurrence of an abnormality in the gaming machine 1 (step B1010). In addition to the abnormality relating to the effect control device 700, when a command for instructing error notification is received from the game control device 600, predetermined processing such as light emission of the notification LED, screen display, and alarm sound output is executed. Note that the actual notification includes sound control processing (step B1012) and decoration control processing (step B101) described later.
3) The motor / solenoid (SOL) control process (step B1014) is executed.

Then, the main control microcomputer 710 edits a command transmitted to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 720, and executes an effect command editing process to be written to a predetermined register (
Step B1011).

The main control microcomputer 710 executes sound control processing for controlling sound output from the speaker 10 (step B1012). Also, decoration devices such as LEDs (board decoration device 1
01, a decoration control process for controlling the frame decoration device 181) is executed (step B1013), and further an effect device (board effect device 102, frame effect device 182) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid or movable illumination. ) Is executed (step B1014).

Finally, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as a production random number (step B1015), and returns to the process of step B1005. Thereafter, the processing from step B1005 to step B1015 is repeated.

[Interrupt processing (production control device)]
Next, interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals by the timer will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an interrupt processing procedure in the effect control device 700 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

The production control device 700 first executes timer update processing for updating the values of various timers (
Step B1101).

Subsequently, the effect control apparatus 700 monitors an external signal input and executes an input process for receiving the input (step B1102). For example, a signal input by operating the effect button 17 is detected, and the input of the signal is accepted.

Further, the effect control device 700 outputs the image instructed by the first scene control processing display control processing (step B1009 in FIG. 77) from the main display device 35, or instructed by the sound control processing (step B1012 in FIG. 77). An output process for outputting the sound effect or the notification sound to the speaker 10 is executed (step B1103).

Finally, the effect control device 700 monitors the input of the main command transmitted from the game control device 600, executes a main command reception process for receiving the main command (step B1104), and ends the interrupt process.

[2nd CPU main processing (production control device)]
Next, details of the other main process executed by the effect control device 700 will be described. FIG. 79 shows a video control microcomputer of the effect control device 700 according to the first embodiment of the present invention (
2nd CPU) 720 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing. The 2nd CPU main process is executed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

The video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 720 first executes CPU initialization processing (
Step B1201). Then, the RAM 721 as a work area is cleared to 0 (step B1202), and initial values necessary for executing various processes are set in the RAM 721 (step B1).
203). Then, a VDP initialization process for initializing a graphic processor that performs image processing is executed (step B1204). Next, various interrupts such as a V blank interrupt are permitted (step B1205).

Further, the video control microcomputer 720 executes an initialization process of various control processes (step B1206). In the initialization process of various control processes, initialization of variables used in each control process to be described later is performed. For example, the background of the video displayed on the main display device 35 (or the sub display device 480) is initialized or the arrangement of symbols is initialized. Then, screen drawing of the main display device 35 (or the sub display device 480) is permitted (step B1207).

Thereafter, the video control microcomputer 720 clears (initializes) the system cycle wait flag (step B1208), and waits until the system cycle wait flag is set to 1 (step B1209).

When the system cycle wait flag is set to 1 (the result of step B1209 is “Y”), the video control microcomputer 720 determines whether the video control microcomputer 720 is operating normally (WDT ( Clear watchdog timer (step B1210)
. Note that if a predetermined time elapses without clearing the WDT, the video control microcomputer 720 is reset.

Subsequently, the video control microcomputer 720 executes a received command check process (step B1211). In the received command check process, a command transmitted from the game control device 600 and received via the main control microcomputer 710 is identified and classified according to a process to be executed thereafter.

Next, the video control microcomputer 720 includes the main display device 35 (or the sub display device 480).
A 2nd scene control process for determining the content to be displayed on the screen is executed (step B1212). Specifically, in the 2nd scene control process, a notice character or the like is set, or the priority order of characters to be displayed is determined.

Next, the video control microcomputer 720 executes background processing for performing background display according to the gaming state and the reach scene (step B1213). Subsequently, a variable display process for performing display control related to the variable display is executed (step B1214). Furthermore, a hold display process for performing a hold display based on the hold effect information stored in the prefetch storage area in the prefetch command receiving process described above is executed (step B1215).

Next, the video control microcomputer 720 executes a customer waiting demo process for setting a customer waiting demo background after elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) after receiving the customer waiting demo command (step B).
1216).

Finally, the video control microcomputer 720 reads the data stored in the image ROM 557 into the RAM.
And display system processing for actual display on the main display device 35 (or sub display device 480) is executed (step B1217), and the processing returns to step B1208. Thereafter, the processing from step B1208 to step B1217 is repeated.

[1st scene control processing]
Next, the 1st scene control process (step B1009) in the 1st main process described above.
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the 1st scene control process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in the testing mode (step B1301). In the case of the in-test mode (the result of step B1301 is “Y
]) The 1st scene control process is terminated.

When the gaming machine 1 is not in the testing mode, the main control microcomputer 710 (step B1
If the result of 301 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the scene change command transmitted from the game control device 600 has been received (step B1302). If the scene change command has not been received (the result of step B1302 is “N”), the processing after step B1307 is executed.

The main control microcomputer 710 receives the scene change command (step B).
The result of 1302 is “Y”), and the (current) gaming state to be updated is acquired (step B130).
3). Further, it is determined whether or not a valid command has been received (step B1304).
. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the change destination scene matches the current gaming state. When the main control microcomputer 710 has not received a valid command (step B1304).
Is “N”), the processing after step B1307 is executed.

When the main control microcomputer 710 receives a valid command (step B1304).
Is "Y"), the received command is saved in the memory (step B1305). Furthermore, an effect request flag is set (step B1306). The effect request flag is a flag indicating that it is time to change the scene, and a process according to whether or not the effect request flag is set is executed in the changing process (step B1311) described later.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 executes processing corresponding to the received command identifier (step B1307).

When the received command is a “power-on command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a power-on process (step B1308). In the power-on process, the screen displayed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on is controlled.

When the received command is a “power failure recovery command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a power failure recovery process (step B1309). In the power failure recovery process, the screen displayed when the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure is controlled. If the customer is in a waiting state when a power failure occurs, a customer waiting process is executed.

When the received command is a “customer waiting demo command”, the main control microcomputer 710
A customer waiting process is executed (step B1310). In the customer waiting process, the screen displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the last execution of the variable display game is controlled. Details of the customer waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the received command is a “fluctuation pattern command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a changing process (step B1311). In the changing process, information necessary for displaying a scene corresponding to the set change pattern is acquired, and effect control corresponding to the set change pattern is performed. Details of the changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the received command is a “symbol stop command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a symbol stop process (step B1312). In the symbol stop process, the variable display is stopped at the specified identification symbol.

When the received command is a “round determination start command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a big hit round determining process (step B1313). In the big hit round determining process, the result of the variable display game is the second special result big hit, and a process for selecting the big hit round number is performed. Details of the big hit round determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the received command is the “fanfare command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a big hit fanfare process (step B1314). In the big hit fanfare process, a fanfare corresponding to the generated big hit is output.

When the received command is the “large open / closed nth command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a process during the big hit round (step B1315). In the big hit round process, effect control during each round in the special game state is performed.

When the received command is an “interval command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a big hit interval process (step B1316). In the big hit interval process, effect control between rounds in the special gaming state is performed.

When the received command is an “ending command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a big hit ending process (step B1317). In the big hit ending process, effect control is performed when the special gaming state ends.

When the execution of the processing based on each command is completed, the main control microcomputer 710 executes the pending number command reception processing (step B1318). The hold number command is a command for notifying the updated hold number, and the hold number command receiving process updates the hold display and the like based on the received hold number.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a decoration special figure command reception process (step B1319). The decoration special figure command reception process is a process of receiving a special decoration figure command transmitted prior to the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a prior determination command reception process (step B).
1320). The prior determination command receiving process is a process of setting a hold display effect or the like based on a prior effect design command including a fall, promotion, and fall promotion, and a prior effect change command.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a probability information command reception process (step B).
1321). The probability information command reception process is a process for setting a gaming state such as an internal probability based on the received probability information command. The probability information command includes, for example, a high accuracy / short time command, a low accuracy / short time command, a low accuracy / no support command, and the like.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a right-handed warning command reception process (step B1322). In the right-handed warning command reception process, the main display device 35 and the sub-display device 4 are used when the player makes a right-handed strike at a timing other than when the right-handed round is determined.
This is a process for displaying a warning at 80 or the like. Details of the right-handed warning command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the right-handed warning command reception process ends, the 1st scene control process ends and the process returns to the 1st main process.

  Next, the display of the main display device 35 and the sub display device 480 will be described.

[Screen display (Main display device / Sub display device)]
FIGS. 81A and 81B are diagrams showing examples of display contents of the main display device 35 and the sub display device 480 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, where FIG. 81A shows a customer waiting state and FIG. 81B shows a state other than the customer waiting state. Is shown.

In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in (A), only the minimum display is performed on the main display device 35 in order to reduce power consumption when waiting for a customer. Yes (energy saving mode). For example, a display that indicates that the display screen brightness is minimized to reduce power consumption (“Energy Saving”) and a display that indicates how to return to the normal screen (“Return by touching the handle or operating a button” ”).

At this time, on the sub display device 480, a demonstration display including a customer waiting demonstration image (video), model information (model name, jackpot probability, probability variation ratio, etc.) and the like is performed. When returning from the energy saving mode, a demo display (a customer waiting demo image) may be output to the main display device 35.
At this time, the sub display device 480 may display only model information, or may display an image different from the main display device 35. Even in the energy saving mode, the sub display device 480 is not turned off. However, since the screen size is smaller than that of the main display device 35, power consumption can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in (B), when the variable display game is being executed in a state other than the customer waiting state, for example, the identification symbol (left ornament symbol, middle ornament symbol, right ornament symbol) is variably displayed. At this time,
The middle decoration symbol may be displayed smaller than other identification symbols (left decoration symbol, right decoration symbol).

An effect display when a reach occurs and an error display when an error occurs are also performed. In the lower part of the main display screen, a memory display area for displaying the start memory shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is allocated, and a pre-reading display and the like are performed together with the start memory display.

At this time, in the sub display device 480, an auxiliary effect (display of an auxiliary effect image and a preview image) of the content displayed on the main display device 35 is performed. In addition, the start memory number is displayed, and the usual figure change display game is executed.

[Screen display (sub display device)]
Next, details of the sub display device 480 will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a configuration of the sub display device 480 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in which (A) is a display screen of the sub display device 480, (B) is a general game auxiliary display area, C) shows a state display symbol (fourth symbol) in the special figure variation display game.

As shown in (A), on the screen of the sub display device 480, a general game auxiliary display area 482 is arranged in the upper right part, and a special game auxiliary display area 483 is arranged in the lower part. The general game auxiliary display area 482 and the special game auxiliary display area 483 are invariable display areas with fixed display positions. Note that the invariant display area may be hidden during the customer waiting demonstration, or the display may be continued as it is.

In the general game auxiliary display area 482, as shown in (B), the start memory number of the general variable display game is displayed on the right side, and the result of the general variable display game is displayed on the left side. The starting memory number of the usual map display game is displayed as a numerical value, but may be displayed in other modes.
The result of the usual map display game is represented by “O” or “X”, but may be in other modes. During the execution of the usual variable display game, “◯” and “×” are displayed in a variable manner.

The special game auxiliary display area 483 includes a special 1 game state display area 484a, a special 1 memory number display area 485a, a special 2 game state display area 484b, and a special 2 memory number display area 485.
b is included.

In the special 1 game state display area 484a, a state display symbol (fourth symbol) in the first special figure variation display game is displayed. In addition, the special memory number display area 485a displays the start memory number for executing the first special figure variation display game. Similarly, the special 2 game state display area 48
In 4b, a state display symbol (fourth symbol) in the second special figure variation display game is displayed. In the special 2 memory number display area 485b, the start memory number for executing the second special figure fluctuation display game is displayed.

Since the start memory numbers displayed in the special 1 memory number display area 485a and the special 2 memory number display area 485b are displayed as numbers, no pre-reading display is performed.

The state display symbols (fourth symbol) displayed in the special 1 game state display region 484a and the special 2 game state display region 484b are changed and stopped in parallel with at least the decorative symbols, so that the progress of the decorative symbol variation display game is progressed. In this embodiment, it is also a symbol for deriving the result of the decorative symbol variation display game together with the decorative symbol (left, middle, right). For example, it is possible to discriminate between small hits and two round big hits that have similar appearance at the time of occurrence of hits by the same decorative symbol combination based on the fourth symbols.

In the variation display of the state display symbol (fourth symbol), as shown in (C), the displayed color is variable. Specifically, “White” → “Blue” → “Green” → “Yellow” → “Orange” → “Red” → “White”
・ The display changes in the order.

Note that the sub display device 480 is not shielded by another movable accessory or the like regardless of whether or not the upper effect device 400 is operating, so that the general game auxiliary display area 482 and the special game auxiliary display are not displayed. The area 483 (the fourth symbol display area 484 and the stored number display area 485 in the special figures 1 and 2) is always visible.

[Waiting for customers]
Next, details of the customer waiting process (step B1310) in the first scene control process described above will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of customer waiting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a customer waiting demo is being executed (step B1401). If the customer waiting demo is not running (the result of step B1401 is “
N "), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting start flag is set (step B1402).
When the customer waiting start flag is not set (the result of Step B1402 is “N”),
A customer waiting start timer is set (step B1403), and a customer waiting start flag is set (step B1404).

The main control microcomputer 710 completes the setting of the customer waiting start flag (step B1404) or when the customer waiting start flag has already been set (step B140).
If the result of 2 is “Y” and the customer waiting start timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step B140).
5). Then, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting start timer is 0 (step B1406).

When the start timer reaches 0 (the result of step B1406 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 executes customer waiting demo setting processing to start the customer waiting demo (step B1407). Furthermore, each waiting demonstration start flag is reset (step B1408),
A setting cancellation timer for canceling the customer waiting demonstration is set (step B1409). When the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed, a selection screen for the firing notification mode is displayed automatically or by the player's operation.

When the setting release timer has been set or the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of step B1401 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines that the release timer is not 0— 1 is updated (step B1410). Then, it is determined whether or not the release timer is 0 (step B1411).

When the setting cancellation timer is 0 (the result of step B1411 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 resets the notification mode set flag (step B1412), and resets the firing notification mode setting (step B1412). B1413). In addition, when the setting of the firing notification mode is reset, the setting is made to notify the timing of each of the fixed side and the variable side.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to select a firing notification mode for assisting in selecting whether to fix the number of big hit rounds or change (lottery) during execution of the customer waiting demonstration. . As described above, after the big hit occurs, the game ball is launched toward the sorting device 90 and the fluctuation side (
The mode of determining the number of big hit rounds can be selected by passing the first passing gate part 34g) or the fixed side (second passing gate part 34h). In this embodiment, it is possible to set the launch notification mode for notifying the opening timing of the gate during the customer waiting demonstration, and a method for setting the launch notification mode will be described below.

When the selection screen for the firing notification mode is displayed on the main display device 35, the main control microcomputer 710 first determines whether or not the firing notification mode is being selected (step B1414). If the firing notification mode is not selected (the result of step B1414 is “N”), it is determined whether or not there is a firing notification switching operation (step B1415). If there is no firing notification switching operation (the result of step B1415 is “Y”), the customer waiting process is terminated.

On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not there is an operation for selecting firing notification (step B1416). When there is a selection of firing notification (the result of step B 1416 is “Y”)
), The firing notification mode corresponding to the selection operation is highlighted (step B1417).

The main control microcomputer 710 determines that the selection operation has not been performed (the result of step B 1416 is “N”).
), Or when the highlighting of the firing notification mode corresponding to the selection operation ends, it is further determined whether or not there is an operation for confirming the selected firing notification mode (step B1418). Furthermore, when there is no confirmation operation of the firing notification mode (the result of step B1418 is “N”), the customer waiting process is terminated.

When there is an operation for confirming the firing notification mode, the main control microcomputer 710 (step B14).
The result of 18 is “Y”), and the firing notification mode corresponding to the confirmation operation is set (step B141).
9). Further, the notification mode set flag is saved (step B1420), and a confirmation screen is displayed for a predetermined time (step B1421). Thereafter, the customer waiting process is terminated. As for the selection of the firing notification mode, the firing notification mode setting process (FIG. 97) and the setting screen (FIG. 103,
This will be described in further detail with reference to FIG.

[Fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the changing process (step B1311) in the first scene control process described above will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the changing process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not an effect request flag is set (step B1501). When the effect request flag is set (the result of step B1501 is “Y”), various information is set.

Specifically, the main control microcomputer 710 first clears PB (push button) information (step B1502). The PB (push button) information is input information by the effect button 17.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 sets a movable body request (step B15).
03). That is, the operation mode of the movable illumination or the electric accessory is set according to the contents of the production.

Furthermore, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a variation effect pattern setting process (step B1504). In the variation effect pattern setting process, a stop symbol of the special figure variation display game is set, or a variation time and a notice effect are set based on the variation pattern command.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 executes an accessory effect operation setting process (step B1).
505). The accessory effect operation setting process is a process of setting an effect device that performs an effect corresponding to the variation pattern and the content (effect mode) of the effect operation by the effect device. Based on the effect mode set in the accessory effect operation setting process, a back side effect operation control process (step B1513) to be described later.
), Lower effect operation control process (step B1514), upper effect operation control process (step B)
1515), the right part production operation control process (step B1516) is executed.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes random number seed initialization processing (step B15).
06). The random number seed initialization process is a process for initializing a random number seed used for determining the contents of the production.

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 sets a scene sequence table corresponding to the set variation pattern (step B1507). Thereafter, a variable time setting process for setting the variable time is executed (step B1508). Then, the first scene is set, and a scene update timer is set (step B1509). Finally, the effect request flag is cleared (step B1510), and the changing process ends.

On the other hand, when the effect request flag is not set (the result of step B1501 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the scene update timer has become 0 (step B1511). When the scene update timer reaches 0 (the result of step B1511 is “Y”), that is, in the case of scene switching timing, the next scene data set in the scene sequence table is set (step B1512).

Furthermore, the main control microcomputer 710 operates various movable accessories (direction devices) corresponding to the scene. Specifically, the back side production operation control process (step B1513), the bottom production operation control process (step B1514), the top production operation control process (step B1515), and the right part production operation control process (step B1516) are executed. .

Here, the effect aspect regarding various movable accessories is demonstrated. The specific contents of the back side production operation will be further described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87, and the upper production operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. Further, details of the right portion production operation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.
The right part production operation will be further described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94.

[Back side production device]
FIGS. 85A and 85B are views of the back side production apparatus 300 according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the upper right side, in which FIG. 85A shows a state before the shutter unit 330 slides, and FIG. The state during the slide operation is shown. FIGS. 86A and 86B are views of the operation of the back side production apparatus 300 according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front, where FIG. 86A shows a state before the turning door 340 is turned, and FIG. The state after the moving door 340 rotates is shown.

Referring to FIG. 85 (A), when the center frame 34 is viewed from above, the upper surface wall 222b of the cover member 222 is decorated with characters. In addition, between the top wall 222b,
The movable decorative member 223 is disposed so as to overlap the lower center of the main display device 35 from the front. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the shutter units 330 arranged on the left and right slide from the accommodation space toward the center of the main display device 35.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86A, the left and right shutter units 330 each move to a predetermined position. When the left and right shutter units 330 move to a predetermined position, the pivot door 34 is moved.
0 is in a rotatable state. The pivot door 340 can be pivoted independently of the operation of the shutter unit 330.

A gap is provided between the lower protrusions 330b of the left and right shutter units 330 in order to prevent damage due to contact or the like. In this case, the gap cannot be visually recognized from the player who is playing the game, regardless of whether or not the effect by the movable decorative member 223 is being executed. The effect by the movable decorative member 223 (lower effect device 220) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, a partition area is formed by the left and right shutter units 330 until the rotation door 340 provided in the left and right shutter units 330 rotates, and the display by the main display device 35 can be visually recognized. Yes. At this time, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the identification symbol displayed on the main display device 35 is reduced and displayed so as to be visible to the player, and a reach effect image is further displayed. Also, there is an area where the display by the main display device 35 can be visually recognized outside the left and right shutter units 330, and an effect image (external effect image) is also displayed in this area.

Thereafter, the left and right pivot doors 340 are pivoted to shield the central portion of the main display device 35. On the back side of the revolving door 340, the left and right revolving doors 340 come close to each other so as to have a design (design). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG.
The character decoration of is derived. At this time, a magnetic body 344 is accommodated on the facing side of the left and right turning doors 340, and the left and right turning doors 340 are configured to maintain a combined state in which they are close by magnetic force.

Further, one of the magnetic bodies that are provided in the rotating door 340 and adsorb to each other is a hard magnetic body and the other is a soft magnetic body. For example, the right rotating door 340 has a hard magnetic body on the upper side and a soft magnetic body on the lower side, and the left rotating door 340 has a soft magnetic body on the upper side and a hard magnetic body on the lower side. Thereby, compared with the case where a hard magnetic body is disposed on one of the pivot doors 340 and a soft magnetic body is disposed on the other pivot door 340, the positional deviation occurs when the left and right pivot doors 340 are combined. It becomes difficult to occur. Note that both of the magnets housed in the left and right pivot doors 340 may be hard magnetic materials.

[Lower production device]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the lower rendering device 220 according to the first embodiment of this invention.
) Is a view of the state of the movable decorative member 223 before the operation is viewed from above, and (B) is the movable decorative member 223.
The figure which looked at the state after this operation | movement from the front is shown.

Referring to (A), as described above, the movable decorative member 223 is moved to the left and right shutter units 3.
It arrange | positions so that the clearance gap between 30 lower side protrusion parts 330b may be covered from the front so that a player cannot visually recognize. Thereby, the left and right shutter units 330 are actually combined (contacted).
In spite of this, it can appear as if it is united (contacted), and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect while preventing damage to the lower protrusions 330b of the left and right shutter units 330. . The movable decorative member 223 may be moved when the shutter unit 330 is slid, or may be operated alone. Also, the upper protrusions 330a of the left and right shutter units 330 may be made difficult to visually recognize the gap with a decorative member such as the movable decorative member 223, like the lower protrusion 330b.

As shown in (B), when the movable decorative member 223 is moved upward, the entire decorative body 224 becomes visible to the player. Even in this case, as described above, the movable decorative member 223 is used.
However, the gap between the lower protrusions 330b of the left and right shutter units 330 is not visible to the player. In addition, about the member which shields the clearance gap between the upper side protrusion part 330a and the lower side protrusion part 330b so that visual recognition is difficult, it is good also as a non-movable decoration member.

[Upper production device]
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the main display device 35 and the sub display device 480 from the start of the variable display game to the temporary stop in the first embodiment of the present invention.

If a floating display game is started and the expectation of a big hit (special result mode) is high, (
As shown in A), the notice effect image is displayed on the sub display device 480. It should be noted that the degree of expectation is higher when the notice effect image is displayed than when the notice effect image is not displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in (B), an auxiliary effect image is displayed on the sub display device 480, and reach occurs. The auxiliary effect image may correspond to the notice effect, or may be an independent image corresponding to the degree of expectation or the like.

Then, as shown in (C), when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, an operation sign image is displayed on the sub display device 480. When the motion sign image is displayed, the effect is executed in a manner that suggests the start (development) of the operation of the sub display device 480, such as the upper effect device 400 vibrating up and down. Although the identification symbol may stop from the temporary stop state shown in (C), if it develops, the temporary stop of the symbol continues and the effect shown in FIG. 89 is executed.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the development effect executed by the upper effect device 400 after the variable display game is temporarily stopped in the first embodiment of the present invention.

Referring to (A), the start of the development effect is displayed in the variable display area 481 of the sub display device 480, and the upper effect device 400 performs the descending operation. Thereafter, as shown in (B), the upper effect device 400 operates so as to vibrate up and down, and an effect corresponding to the degree of expectation that is a big hit (special result mode) is executed.

Referring to (C), a message indicating that the degree of expectation to be a big hit (special result mode) is medium (“Ikuzo!”) Is displayed, and thereafter, the ascending operation of the upper effect device is executed. . And as shown to (D), the production | presentation which shows that the expectation degree which becomes a big hit (special result aspect) is medium is performed.

Referring to (E), the variable display area 481 is in a transmissive state, and the light guide plate 4 located at the rear side.
When the light emission effect by 70 is executed, a message (“Large chance !!!!”) is displayed indicating that the degree of expectation that will be a big hit (special result mode) is high. Then, the ascending operation of the upper effect device is executed, and as shown in (F), an effect indicating that the degree of expectation to be a big hit (special result mode) is large. By executing such an effect, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation for the big hit, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Right production device]
Next, the details of the right effect operation control process (step B1516) in the above-described changing process will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of right portion effect operation control processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not it is set to execute the right effect operation in the accessory effect operation setting process (step B1505) (step B7001).
If it is not set to execute the right effect operation (the result of step B7001 is “N”), the right effect operation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the main control microcomputer 710 is set to execute the right effect operation (the result of Step B7001 is “Y”), it determines whether or not it is the effect start timing (Step B7002). ). When it is not the production start timing (the result of Step B7002 is “N”), the processing after Step B7006 is executed.

When the main control microcomputer 710 is the production start timing (step B7002).
Is “Y”), the moving operation of the movable decorative unit 550 is set (step B700).
3). Further, a hand-holding effect image is displayed on the main display device 35 (step B7004).
). The hand-holding effect image is an image for explaining an effect using an infrared sensor (hereinafter, referred to as “human sensor”) 590 provided in the movable decoration unit 550, as shown in FIG. Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 sets the maximum rotation speed of the rotating cylinder 580 according to the reliability that is a big hit (step B7005).

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the human sensor 590 is valid (human detection period) (step B7006). If it is during the human detection period (the result of step B7006 is “Y”), the hand holding effect image is updated (step B7007).
In the updated hand holding effect image, for example, as shown in FIG. 92, a more specific operation is explained, or the remaining time is displayed as shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not human detection has been performed (step B7008). When human detection is made (the result of step B7008 is “Y”), if the rotating cylinder 580 has not reached the maximum rotating speed, the rotating speed of the rotating cylinder 580 is increased (step B7009).

The main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not it is the production end timing (step B).
7010). When it is not the production end timing (the result of step B7010 is “N”)
Then, the right part production operation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the case of the production end timing, the main control microcomputer 710 (step B701).
The result of 0 is “Y”), the rotation of the rotary cylinder 580 is stopped and the return operation of the movable decorative unit 550 is set (step B7011), and an effect result image is displayed on the main display device 35 as shown in FIG. (Step B7012).

FIGS. 91 to 94 are diagrams for explaining the aspect of the right portion effect operation according to the first embodiment of this invention. An effect (“hand holding chance” effect) by the right effect device 500 is executed when a reach occurs. When the “hand-holding chance” effect is being executed, the identification symbol is displayed on the main display device 35.
In the upper right part of the screen, it is displayed variably in a reduced state.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the “hand-holding chance” effect is started, first, the contents of the “hand-holding chance” effect and an explanation of the operation are displayed. At this time, the right part production device 500 moves toward the center of the game board.

Further, in the “hand-holding chance” effect, the player shakes his / her hand in front of the rotary cylinder 580 provided in the right direction producing device 500 and detects it by the human sensor 590, whereby the rotary cylinder 5
80 can be rotated. Further, the rotating cylinder 580 is configured to rotate at a high speed in accordance with the speed and number of times of waving.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, when the right part production device 500 moves to the center of the game board and reaches a predetermined position, the explanation display unit appears after the right part production device 500 moves. In addition, a display suggesting the position where the hand is held (the detection range of the human sensor 590) is made. Further, as shown in FIG. 93, the remaining time of the “hand-holding chance” effect is displayed on the main display device 35. The remaining time may be displayed on the sub display device 480.

When the “hand-holding chance” effect is timed up, as shown in FIG. 94A, information indicating the degree of expectation (“It ’s super hot!”) Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94B, the development effect is executed. By executing such an effect, the player actively participates in the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Processing during big hit round decision]
Next, the big hit round decision process (step B) in the 1st scene control process described above
Details of 1313) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the big hit round determining process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a round determination start command has been received (step B7101). If the round decision start command has not been received (the result of step B7101 is “N”), the processing after step B7106 is executed.

On the other hand, when receiving the round determination start command (the result of Step B7101 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the descending operation of the sub display device 480 (Step B7102). Further, a firing stop suggestion image is displayed on the sub display device 480 (step B7103). As shown in FIG. 101 (B), the sub display device 480 is lowered, and the sub display device 480 is caused to display a firing stop suggestion image including a message suggesting to stop the firing temporarily. Further, a message for explaining the game is displayed on the main display device 35. Thereafter, the game description is continued on the main display device 35 (FIG. 102).

Furthermore, the main control microcomputer 710 outputs a firing stop suggestion voice (step B7104).
), “1” is set as the process number in the big hit round determination process (step B7105).
).

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a distribution state command has been received (
Step B7106). When the distribution state command is received (the result of Step B7106 is “Y”), the distribution state notification corresponding to the received distribution state command is executed (Step B7107). The distribution state notification is, for example, a lens member 61 corresponding to the received distribution state,
63 is caused to emit light.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a process corresponding to the process number (step B71).
08). When the process number is “1”, a round determination method explanation process for explaining a game for determining the big hit round is executed (step B7109). Details of the round determination method explanation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process number is “2”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a firing notification mode setting process for notifying the firing timing for determining whether to change or fix the big hit round (step B7110). . Details of the firing notification mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process number is “3”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a firing timing notifying process for notifying the firing timing corresponding to the jackpot round determination method set by the player (step B7111). Details of the firing timing notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a round number determination command has been received (step B7112). If the round number determination command has not been received (the result of step B7112 is “N”), the big hit round determining process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the main control microcomputer 710 receives a round number determination command notifying that the number of rounds has been determined (the result of step B7112 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 generates a gate passing sound corresponding to the round number determination command. Output (step B7113). As shown in FIG. 99, the gate passing sound corresponding to the round number determination command is, for example, “Zukuon!” For 15 rounds, “Pushu!” For 5 rounds, and “Chakeen!” For 10 rounds. Different notification sounds are set as shown in FIG.

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 displays a round finalized image corresponding to the finalized round on the main display device 35 (step B7114). Furthermore, a round final image corresponding to the final round is displayed on the sub display device 480 (step B7115). After that, in order to return the descending sub display device 480 to its original state, the ascending operation is set (step B7116).
), The distribution state notification is stopped (step B7117). Thereafter, the big hit round determining process is terminated.

[Round decision method explanation process]
Next, details of the round determination method explanation processing (step B7109) in the big hit round determination processing described above will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the round determination method explanation processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the update timer has been set (step B7201). The update timer is a timer for managing the time for outputting the round determination method to the main display device 35. When the update timer has been set (the result of step B7201 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 executes the processing after step B7207.

When the update timer has not been set, the main control microcomputer 710 (step B72)
If the result of 01 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the first hit in the non-electric support state (whether or not the explanation display condition is satisfied) (step B7202). In the case of the first hit in the non-electric support state (step B72
If the result of 02 is “Y”), that is, in the case of the first big hit after the game start in the non-electric support state, a detailed explanation image of the round determination method is displayed on the main display device 35 (step B72)
03). Then, a detailed explanation update timer is set (step B7204).

On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 is not the first hit in the non-electric support state (step B7).
202 result is “N”), that is, if a big hit has already occurred since the start of the game,
Since the detailed explanation image of the round determination method has already been displayed, a simple explanation image of the round determination method is displayed on the main display device 35 (step B7205). Then, a simple explanation update timer is set (step B7206).

If the update timer has been set (the result of step B7201 is “Y”), step B7
When the processing of step 206 or step B7206 is completed, the main control microcomputer 7 continues.
10 updates -1 if the update timer is not 0 (step B7207). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the update timer has reached 0 (step B7208).

The main control microcomputer 710 determines that the update timer is not 0 (step B72).
When the result of 08 is “N”), the image is updated to an explanation image corresponding to the timer value of the update timer (step B
7209). On the other hand, when the update timer reaches 0 (the result of step B7208 is “Y
”), The processing number is set to“ 2 ”(step B7210). Thereafter, the round determination method explanation processing ends.

[Launch mode setting process]
Next, the firing mode setting process (step B71 in the big hit round determination process described above)
Details of 10) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the launch mode setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether there is a notification mode set flag (
Step B7301). The notification mode set flag is set when the player has already determined whether the method for determining the big hit round is variable or fixed. When there is a notification mode setting flag (the result of step B7301 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the processing number to “3”.
(Step B7311), and the firing mode setting process is terminated.

The main control microcomputer 710, when there is no notification mode set flag (step B73)
If the result of 01 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the setting screen has been displayed (step B730).
2). If it has not been displayed (the result of step B7302 is “Y”), a firing notification mode setting screen is displayed (step B7303).

Furthermore, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not there is an operation for selecting a firing notification mode on the firing notification mode setting screen (step B7304). When there is an operation for selecting the firing notification mode (the result of step B7304 is “Y”), the firing notification mode corresponding to the selection operation is highlighted (step B7305).

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not there is an operation for confirming the selected firing notification mode (step B7306). If there is no confirmation operation for the selected firing notification mode (the result of step B7306 is “N”), the firing mode setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is a confirmation operation for the selected firing notification mode (the result of Step B7306 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets a firing notification mode corresponding to the confirmation operation (Step B7307). The notification mode set flag is saved (step B7308). Further, a setting confirmation screen is displayed on the main display device 35 (step B7309), and a guidance display screen is displayed on the sub display device 480 (step B7310). Then, set the process number to “3”
(Step B7311), and the firing mode setting process is terminated.

[Launch Timing Notification Process]
Next, details of the firing timing notification process (step B7111) in the big hit round determination process described above will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the round determination method explanation processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 checks the setting of the firing notification mode (step B7).
401). Then, it is determined whether or not the set launch notification mode is a default (both (variation, fixed) notification) setting (step B7402). If the set launch notification mode is the default setting (the result of step B7402 is “Y”), a state notification image corresponding to the distribution state command is displayed (step B7407). As shown in FIG. 100, when the distribution state command indicates the fluctuation side, a message such as “Now it is a variable gate!” Is displayed as the state notification image 1, and the distribution state command indicates the fixed side. In this case, a message such as “Now it is a fixed gate!” Is displayed as the status notification image 2.

On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the received distribution state command corresponds to the setting of the firing notification mode (steps B7403 and B7404). When the received distribution state command corresponds to the setting of the firing notification mode (the result of step B7404 is “
Y "), a firing suggestion image is displayed on the sub display device 480 (step B7405). If the received distribution state command does not correspond to the setting of the firing notification mode (the result of Step B7404 is “N”), a firing standby suggestion image is displayed on the sub display device 480 (Step B740).
6). As shown in FIG. 100, when the received distribution state command corresponds to the setting of the firing notification mode, a message such as “Now hit it!” Is displayed as the firing suggestion image. When the minute state command does not correspond to the setting of the firing notification mode, a message such as “Stay still!” Is displayed as the firing standby suggestion image.

[Launch notification mode]
Here, the selection of the firing notification mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102 explain the flow from the result of the (decoration) special figure variation display game according to the first embodiment of the present invention until the method of determining the big hit round after the second special result is presented. It is a figure to do. 103 and 104 are diagrams illustrating a procedure for selecting a fire notification mode for determining a big hit round according to the first embodiment of this invention. 105 and 106 are diagrams illustrating the flow from when the image indicating the firing notification timing according to the first embodiment of this invention is displayed until the game ball passes through the passing gate.

FIG. 101A shows a state in which the second special result big hit (probability change, normal) in which a lottery for the big hit round is performed as a result of the variable display game. At this time, since the number of jackpot rounds has not been determined, the special gaming state has not started. Further, the sorting member (switching unit 93) of the sorting device 90 is switched between the fluctuation side and the fixed side at a predetermined time interval. As described above, the LED is lit (flashes) through the lens members 61 and 63 in response to switching of the distribution member (switching unit 93). Note that the switching of the sorting member (switching unit 93) of the sorting apparatus 90 is continuously switched between the variable side and the fixed side at a predetermined time interval other than when the big hit round is determined.

Thereafter, as shown in (B), the upper effect device 400 moves down and the sub display device 480 is moved.
Is displayed in the variable display area 481 to temporarily stop the game ball.
At this time, the main display device 35 displays a message to the effect that the game will be explained. As will be described later, since the sub display device 480 notifies the player to stop the release of the game ball, the player can be surely noticed by moving the upper effect device 400 (moving down).

Further, as described above, the sub display device 480 is arranged in the vicinity of the sorting device 90 and in front of the main display device 35 so as not to overlap with the game description displayed on the main display device 35. By making it move, it is possible to effectively suppress the launch of the game ball toward the sorting device 90.

FIG. 102 shows a state in which the description of the game for determining the big hit round is displayed on the main display device 35. At this time, the sub display device 480 continues to display a message indicating that the game ball is temporarily stopped from firing.

In the present embodiment, the number of big hit rounds is determined by passing a game ball through a passing gate. Referring to FIG. 103, it is in a state for selecting any of the “fixed”, “lottery”, and “both” notification modes. The selection of the notification mode is selected by operating the selection button 29 and confirmed by operating the effect button 17. For example, FIG.
As shown in (B), by selecting “Lottery” with the selection button 29 and operating the effect button 17, as shown in FIG.

The jackpot round number will be described further. As shown in FIGS. 41 (B) and 41 (C), “
“Fixed” is fixed by 10 rounds, and “Lottery” is selected by drawing either 5 rounds or 15 rounds. By clearly showing this in the main display device 35, it becomes possible for the player to understand the mode of determining the game value for each gate (specific area), and the game of determining the number of rounds (auxiliary game) is smooth. Can be achieved.

Thus, since it can be set so that the player can select and notify the distribution state, any one of “fixed (first specific area)” and “lottery (second specific area)” is specified. It becomes easy to perform a game ball launching operation aiming at an area.

The case where “lottery” is selected will be described. As shown in FIG. 105 (A), in the state where the switching unit 93 closes the variable side, a message (“Still wait” !! ”) is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in (B), in a state in which the switching unit 93 opens the variable side, a message for instructing firing (“Stay now!”) Is displayed on the sub display device 480. .

In this way, at the timing of selecting the jackpot round number determination method specified by the player,
Since the game ball launch timing is notified, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being launched at a time different from the set launch timing.

Then, according to the notification, the game balls are fired, and as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the game balls are passed through the gate designated by the player, so that the lottery for the big hit round is performed.
In (A), since the game ball has passed through the first passing gate portion 34g on the variable side, a lottery of the number of big hit rounds of 5 rounds or 15 rounds is performed. In (B), there are 15 rounds
Since the round is won, a message indicating that effect (“15R confirmed!”) Is displayed on the main display device 35, and a blessing message is displayed on the sub display device 480.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the number of jackpot rounds (special game state type) is determined against the player's intention while allowing the player to understand the contents of the auxiliary game for selecting the jackpot determination method. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being lost.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the information regarding the auxiliary gaming state is displayed on the main display device 35, and the sub-display device 480 notifies the player to stop the release of the game ball so that the player can easily understand the information. Can be presented.

[Right-hand warning]
Next, the details of the right-handed warning command reception process (step B1322) in the first scene control process described above will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of right-handed warning command reception processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether a right-hand warning is being displayed (step B7501). When the right-hand warning is being displayed (the result of step B7501 is “Y”),
The processing after step B7507 is executed.

The main control microcomputer 710 does not display a right-handed warning (step B75).
If the result of 01 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a right-handed warning command has been received (step B7).
502). If a right-handed warning command has not been received (the result of step B7502 is “N”), the right-handed warning command reception process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the right control warning command is received (the result of Step B7502 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the notice effect is being executed on the sub display device 480 (Step S7502). B7503). When the notice effect is being executed on the sub display device 480 (the result of step B7503 is “Y”), the right-handed warning command receiving process is terminated in order to prioritize the display of the notice effect.

Note that a right-handed warning image may be displayed even when a notice effect is being executed. In this case, a reduced display is performed so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the displayed preview image.

On the other hand, when the notice effect is not being executed on the sub display device 480 (the result of Step B7503 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the descending operation of the sub display device 480 (Step B7504). At this time, when the variable display game is executed on the main display device 35, a right-handed warning image to be described later may be displayed at the initial position without lowering the sub display device 480.

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 displays a right-handed warning image on the sub display device 480 (
Step B7505). The right-handed warning image may be a left-pointing suggestion image. Further, the main control microcomputer 710 sets a warning display timer (step B7506).

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 updates −1 if the display timer is not 0 (step B7507). Then, it is determined whether the display timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step B7508). If the display timer is not up (Step B
If the result of 7508 is “N”), the right-handed warning command receiving process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the display timer expires (the result of step B7508 is “Y”), main control microcomputer 710 sets the ascending operation to return sub display device 480 to the initial position (step B7509). . Furthermore, the right-handed warning image (left aiming suggestive image) of the sub display device is deleted (step B7510), and the right-handed warning command receiving process is terminated.

FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating an example of a right-handed warning according to the first embodiment of this invention.
) Is the first pass gate part 34g or the second pass gate part 34 by making a right turn during the normal game.
A state where a game ball passes through h is shown, and (B) shows a state where a right-handed warning is given.

In a game in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, left-handed is performed except when the big hit round is determined. As shown in (A), when the game ball passes through the first passing gate part 34g or the second passing gate part 34h by making a right turn during a normal game, the game control device 60
A right-handed warning command is transmitted from 0 to the effect control device 700.

When receiving the right-handed warning command, the effect control device 700 lowers the sub-display device 480 as shown in (B), and the right-handed warning image (“fired to the left” is displayed in the variable display area 481 of the sub-display device 480. Please display "). At this time, when the variable display game is being executed on the main display device 35, as described above, without lowering the sub display device 480,
A right-handed warning image may be displayed in the initial position.

[Error monitoring]
Next, the gaming machine error monitoring process (step B1010 in the first main process described above)
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine error monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a RAM initialization notification process (step B20).
01). The RAM initialization notification process is performed when the game control device 600 and the effect control device 7 are activated.
This is a process for notifying that 00 RAM has been initialized.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a frame opening sensor error notification process (step B2002). In the frame opening sensor error notification process, while the glass frame 6 and the front frame 5 are opened, specifically, from receiving a frame opening command to receiving a closing command,
An error is reported. For error notification, a notification sound is output or the gaming state notification LED 12 is turned on. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112, an error occurs in the main display device 35, and an error type in the sub display device 480. (Error code) is displayed, and the speaker 10
It is designed to notify by sound.

Thus, the main display device (first display device) 35 and the sub display device (second display device)
By displaying an error in 480, it is possible to improve the deterrent effect of an act that may be fraudulent.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a payout error notification process (step B200).
3). In the payout error notification process, an error generated in the payout control is notified based on the command transmitted from the payout control device 640.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes magnetic sensor error notification processing (step B).
2004). In the magnetic sensor error notification process, an error is notified based on a command transmitted from the game control device 600 based on the abnormality detected by the magnetic sensor 23.

As shown in FIG. 111, the magnetic sensor 23 is disposed upstream of a gate (for example, a normal start gate 36) through which a game ball passes and a winning opening (for example, a starting winning opening 37, 38, a general winning opening 40). Is done. This is to detect fraud such as changing the trajectory of the game ball by a magnetic force such as a magnet to win a prize.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes radio wave sensor error notification processing (step B).
2005). In the radio wave sensor error notification process, an error is notified based on a command transmitted from the game control device 600 based on the abnormality detected by the radio wave sensor 24.

Finally, the main control microcomputer 710 executes human sensor error notification processing (step B2005). In the human sensor error notification process, the production control device 700 performs the human sensor 590.
An error is notified independently on the basis of the abnormality detected by.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 111, the human sensor 590 is arranged to cover an area (human sensor detection range) 992 that cannot be covered by the magnetic sensor 23. Thus, by setting the region 992 that is not the detection range 991 of the magnetic sensor 23 as the detection range by the human sensor 590, the number of the magnetic sensors 23 can be reduced.

The magnetic sensor 23 may be accommodated in the dummy accommodating portion 275. Thereby, the detection range of the magnetic sensor 23 can be expanded. Further, although the magnetic sensor 23 is provided on the decorative member behind the game board, it may be arranged on the front or back of the game board 32.

In the present embodiment, the human sensor 590 is used for production when the right effect device 500 is movable. However, when the right effect device 500 is not movable, the human sensor 590 is caused to function as an abnormality detection sensor. As described above, control is performed so that an abnormality (error) is notified when the human sensor 590 is in a detection state for a predetermined time or longer. Details of the human sensor error notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

As described above, the detection range by the human sensor 590 is the general winning opening 4 arranged at the lower right.
It covers the upstream part of zero. In this way, by setting the detection range upstream of the winning opening, it is possible to effectively detect an abnormal action that may be fraudulent.

Next, human sensor error processing (step B20 in the gaming machine error monitoring processing described above)
The details of (06) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart illustrating a human sensor error processing procedure according to the first embodiment of this invention. In human sensor error processing, human sensor 5
While the effect using 90 is not executed, the human sensor 590 notifies the user of an error when human detection is continued for a predetermined period.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 checks whether or not a variable display game for performing a rendering operation by the right rendering device 500 (a rendering motion variation display game) is being executed (step B760).
1). Then, it is determined whether or not the effect movement variation display game is being executed (step B7).
602). When the effect movement variation display game is being executed (the result of step B7602 is “
Y "), and the processing after step B7609 is executed.

If the effect movement variation display game is not being executed (the result of Step B7602 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the human motion detection state is set (Step B76).
03). If it is a human detection state (the result of step B7603 is “Y”), the error determination counter is updated by one (step B7604).

The main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the value of the error determination counter has reached the error determination value (step B7605). When the value of the error determination counter reaches the error determination value (the result of step B7605 is “Y”), error notification is executed (step B7606). The error detection by the human sensor is due to the fact that a part of the player's body is located at a position unrelated to the game, so the error notification is performed for a short time (for example, about 1 to 2 seconds). ) Or may be canceled as soon as the non-human detection state is reached.

On the other hand, when the main control microcomputer 710 is not in the human detection state (step B7603).
Is "N"), it is determined whether or not the non-human detection state has continued for a predetermined time (step B7607). If the non-human detection state continues (the result of step B7607 is “Y”), the error determination counter is reset (step B7608).

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined that an error has occurred when a human detection state is detected a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, and a notification sound is output. In other words, under normal conditions,
It is possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormal situation (in other words, an act that may be fraudulent) such that the human sensor 590 that is in a non-detection state is in a human detection state (detection state) for a predetermined period of time. It becomes possible.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not an error is being notified (step B).
7609). If no error notification is being made (the result of step B7609 is “N”), the human sensor error process is terminated.

On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether the error notification cancellation condition is satisfied (step B7610) when the error notification is being performed (the result of step B7609 is "Y").
). The condition for canceling the error notification is, for example, when there is a cancel input from an employee or a player of the game hall, and when the non-human detection state continues for a predetermined time. The release input may be provided with a dedicated switch or may be a special operation such as a long press of the effect button 17 (for example, 3 seconds).

When the error notification cancellation condition is satisfied, the main control microcomputer 710 (step B7).
If the result of 610 is “Y”), the error notification is canceled (step B7611). On the other hand, if the error notification release condition is not satisfied (the result of step B7610 is “N”), the error notification is continued, and then the human sensor error processing is terminated.

According to the present embodiment, the detection by the human sensor (non-contact sensor, infrared sensor) 590 is used for performing a predetermined effect (right part effect) and also used for determining the occurrence of an abnormality. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively use the human sensor 590 at times other than when performing an effect.

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, a special game state is not started only when the variable display game has a special result, and a specific gate (lottery gate) provided in the game area after the variable display game has a special result. ) To execute a supplementary game in which the number of rounds is determined based on a random number extracted based on the passing of the game ball, and to start a special game state corresponding to the number of rounds determined in the supplementary game. A thing is proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2008-132167). Also, a plurality of specific gates (lottery gates) are provided, and an auxiliary game is executed in which the type of special game state is determined according to the lottery form corresponding to the specific gate through which the game ball has passed after the variable display game has a special result. A gaming machine has also been proposed (for example, JP2009-189A).
No. 504).

However, in a gaming machine that executes an auxiliary game that determines the type of special game state (number of rounds, etc.) by passing through a specific gate as described in the above-mentioned patent document, the content of the auxiliary game is There was a problem that the player could not understand immediately.
In addition, when a game ball passes through a specific gate for the first time after a special result, the type of special game state is determined, so that the game ball fired during the variable display game passes through the specific gate, and the player There was also a possibility that the type of special gaming state would be determined against the will of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, while allowing the player to understand the contents of the auxiliary game for selecting the jackpot determination method, the number of jackpot rounds (in the special gaming state) against the player's intention. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the type is determined.

Some conventional gaming machines include a non-contact sensor (such as an infrared sensor) that can detect that a part of the player's body (mainly a hand) has entered the detection range at a predetermined position on the game board. A sensor that provides a predetermined effect based on detecting a part (mainly a hand) of the player's body with a non-contact sensor during the effectable period has been proposed (for example, JP2010-1244
45).

However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, the input from the non-contact sensor is effective only during the stage where the presentation can be performed, and the non-contact sensor cannot be effectively used.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively utilize a non-contact sensor capable of detecting a part of the player's body in addition to the production.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines have a gaming board in which a gaming area in which gaming balls can flow down is formed on the front surface of a gaming board that is detachably stored in a frame, and the gaming board is made of a transparent resin. There has been proposed a gaming machine that aims to improve the decoration effect by disposing a decorative member at the rear and allowing the decorative member to be seen through a game board (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-99515).

However, in the case of using a game board made of a transparent resin as in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, the static electricity is more easily charged than the wooden game board, and the gaming machine is caused by the charged static electricity. May malfunction. Therefore, it is conceivable that the static electricity charged on the game board escapes to the grounded frame body and is removed. However, if the game board is provided with a conductive member that can contact the frame, the operator may be injured by the conductive member when the game board is transported or attached.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, the static electricity charged on the transparent resin game board can be released to the frame body side and removed, and the conductive board can be used for transporting and removing the gaming board. It is also possible to prevent the worker from being injured.

In addition, in some conventional gaming machines, the game board is made of a transparent resin, and a decorative member is disposed on the rear side so that the decorative member can be seen through the game board, thereby improving the decoration effect. A machine has been proposed (for example, JP 2010-99515 A).

However, when a game board made of transparent resin is used as in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, a wiring process for routing the wiring of the electrical components arranged on the game board to the rear of the game board is performed. It has been broken. At this time, since the wiring of the electrical components routed behind the game board can be visually recognized through the game board of the transparent member, the beauty of the back of the game board is impaired, and the visibility of the decorative member is reduced. The problem of letting it happen.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to efficiently perform the wiring process of the electrical component as compared with the case where the wiring of the electrical component is routed to the end of the decoration space through the front of the three-dimensional decoration member. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the beauty of the back (back side) of the game board and the visibility of the decorative member.

In addition, in a conventional gaming machine, a movable effect device having a movable effect member capable of performing a predetermined effect operation in front of the display unit of the display device is provided, and can be moved according to the progress of the variable display game. There has also been proposed a gaming machine in which the rendering operation is made more complicated by driving the rendering member by a plurality of driving units (for example, JP 2011-125543 A).

However, as in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, if a relatively large movable effect device is disposed around the display device, there is a space for arranging other movable effect devices, decoration members, and the like. There is a problem of narrowing. Therefore, if the movable effect member is downsized to secure space, or if the operation mode of the movable effect member is made monotonous, the effect of the effect is naturally reduced, which also causes a decrease in the interest of the game. End up.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the movable effect device while efficiently using the limited space around the display device.

(Second Embodiment)
In the first embodiment of the present invention, the configuration including one type of sub display device in addition to the main display device has been described. However, in the second embodiment, two types of sub display devices are further provided. A configuration including a total of three types of sub-sub display devices will be described. In the second embodiment, the main display device (variable display device) will be described as the main display device 35, and the sub display devices will be described as the first to third sub display devices.

[Game board]
FIG. 113 is a front view of the game board 30 with the center frame (front component) 34 and the rendering device unit (back component) 200 according to the second embodiment of the present invention attached. FIG. 114 is a front view of the rendering device unit (back surface component) 200 in a state where it is detached from the game board 30 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In addition, about the structure which is common in 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is assigned and description is abbreviate | omitted.

As shown in FIG. 113, the game board 30 has a center frame 34 so as to face the game area.
And an armor portion (access restriction wall) 34i is provided at the peripheral edge (upper, left, right) of the center frame 34 so that a game ball does not enter the center frame 34 from the game area 31. Is formed.

In addition, on the back side of the game board 30, an effect device unit (back surface constituent member) 200 composed of various effect devices is disposed. The center frame 34 and the rendering device unit 200 may be collectively referred to as a center case.

The opening 34a of the center frame 34 is provided corresponding to the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35. The display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 is visually recognized through the opening (display window) 34a of the center frame 34. It is possible. The fluctuation display device 35 is the rendering device unit 2.
00 (so as to face the window 216 formed on the back wall 211 of the unit base member 210 from behind).

In the effect device unit 200, the upper effect device 400 including the sub display device 480 is arranged above the display unit 35a of the main display device (variable display device) 35, as in the first embodiment. The sub display device provided in the upper effect device 400 is hereinafter referred to as a first sub display device (first sub display device) 480 in order to distinguish it from other sub display devices.

Further, in the effect device unit 200, a right effect device 1500 including a second sub-display (second sub-display device) 1580 is arranged on the right side of the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35, and the third
A left effect device 2500 including a sub display (third sub display device) 2580 is arranged on the left side of the display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35. Further, a lower lift unit 1100 is disposed below the display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35.

The upper effect device 400 includes the upper side of the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 and the upper effect device 400.
The reference position (initial position) is a position where the lower sides of the two substantially coincide. And the upper production device 4
A movable arm 1001 is connected to the rear surface side of 00, and can be rotated to the right side of the variable display device 35 around the upper right portion of the variable display device 35 by the rotation mechanism unit 1000 (see FIG. 114). Note that a part of the upper effect device 400 may overlap the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 as viewed from the player at the reference position, or may not overlap.

In addition, the upper effect device 400 has a special 1 hold display LED 471 indicating the number of start memories for executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, and a special 1 that is variably displayed during the execution of the first special figure fluctuation display game. A fourth design LED 472 is arranged.

The right effect device 1500 includes the right side of the display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35 and the right effect device 15.
A position where the left side of 00 substantially coincides is set as a reference position. And the movable arm 1002 is connected to the back surface side of the right part production | presentation apparatus 1500, and the fluctuation | variation display apparatus 35 is by the rotation mechanism part 1000. FIG.
Is pivotable to the upper side of the variable display device 35 (see FIG. 114).
It should be noted that a part of the right effect device 1500 viewed from the player at the reference position is the variable display device 35.
The display unit 35a may or may not overlap.

Further, the right part rendering device 1500 has a special 2 hold display LED 1571 indicating the start memory number for executing the second special figure fluctuation display game, and a special display that is variably displayed during the execution of the second special figure fluctuation display game. 2 4th pattern LED1572 is arrange | positioned.

The left effect device 2500 is arranged so as to face the back side of the game area 31, and the variable display device 3 faces the position behind the warp passage 112 provided on the left side of the center frame 34.
The position at which the left side of the display unit 35a of 5 and the right side of the left rendering device 2500 substantially match is set as the reference position. The left effect device 2500 is slidable in the right direction by the movement mechanism unit 1010, and can be moved to substantially the center on the front side of the variable display device 35 (see FIG. 116). Moreover, when the left part production | presentation apparatus 2500 slides to the front side of the fluctuation | variation display apparatus 35,
Third sub-display 2580 is rotatable about the vertical direction, and left effect device 2500
The player can visually recognize the back side (see FIG. 117).

The left effect device 2500 includes a third sub-display 2580 and a rotation drive unit 2501 that rotates the third sub-display 2580. The rotation drive unit 2501 includes a decorative member 2502.
For example, an effect such as lighting the decorative member 2502 while the third sub-display 2580 is rotating is executed.

The lower lifting / lowering unit 1100 includes a movable unit 1110 including a movable member and an LED, and a lifting mechanism 1120 (see FIG. 170). The movable unit 1110 is configured to be lifted by an elevating mechanism. For example, it is possible to execute an effect linked to another effect device by raising the movable unit 1110 at the timing when the left effect device 2500 slides to the center of the variable display device 35.

A lower decoration unit 260 is provided at the lower part of the rendering device unit 200 (not shown). FIG. 114 shows a flow path component 280 included in the lower decorative unit 260. The flow path component 280 is a start winning opening flow path 28 that guides the game ball that has won the start winning opening downward.
1, a first grand prize winning channel 282 that guides the game ball that has won the grand prize opening downward, and a general prize winning channel 283 that guides the gaming ball that has flowed in from the three left guide passages 293, A general winning opening channel 284 that guides the game ball flowing in from the one guide path 293 on the right side downward.

[Merge operation of sub display unit]
Next, operations of the upper effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG. FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the operations of the top effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500 according to the second embodiment of the present invention, and FIG.
When the right part production device 1500 is at the reference position, (B) shows the case where only the right part production device 1500 rotates. FIG. 116 shows an upper effect device 400 according to the second embodiment of this invention.
FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining the operation of the right effect device 1500, in which (A) only rotates the upper effect device 400, (B) rotates both the upper effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500. Shows the case.

First, the configuration of the upper effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500 will be described. The upper effect device 400 includes a first sub display 480 and a display housing member that houses the first sub display 480. The display housing member is configured by a decorative frame member 473 including a wide frame portion 473a and a narrow frame portion 473b.

In the wide frame portion 473a, a special 1 hold display LED 471 indicating the number of start memories for executing the first special figure variation display game, and a special first and fourth variable variably displayed during the execution of the first special figure variation display game. A design LED 472 is arranged. The narrow frame portion 473b is formed to be narrower than the wide frame portion 473a.

On the other hand, the right rendering device 1500 includes a second sub-display 1580 and a second sub-display 1580.
It is comprised by the indicator accommodating member which accommodates. The display housing member is a wide frame portion 15.
The decorative frame member 1573 includes 73a and a narrow frame portion 1573b.

In the wide frame portion 1573a, a special 2 hold display LED 1571 indicating the start memory number for executing the second special figure fluctuation display game, and a special second display that is variably displayed during the execution of the second special figure fluctuation display game. A design LED 1572 is arranged. The narrow frame portion 1573b is formed to be narrower than the wide frame portion 1573a.

The display modes of the special 1 hold display LED 471 and the special 2 hold display LED 1571 are the same, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 127A. Also, Special 1 4th Design LED 472 and Special 2 4th Design LE
The display mode of D1572 is the same, and will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127B and 127C.

Then, the movable aspect of the top production | presentation apparatus 400 and the right part production | presentation apparatus 1500 is demonstrated.
When the effect that the upper effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500 are movable is not executed, the state is stopped at the reference position as shown in FIG. When it is at the reference position, a display effect is executed on the sub-display or game information is displayed.

As described above, the top effect device 400 is the movable arm 10 connected to the back surface (or side portion).
01 (1001a, 1001b) can be rotated by 90 ° in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, the right part production device 1500 has a movable arm 1002 (or upper part) connected to the rear surface (or upper part).
1002a, 1002b) allows a maximum 90 ° clockwise rotation.

In the present embodiment, either one or both of the top effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500 rotate, whereby the narrow frame portion 473b of the upper effect device 400 and the narrow frame portion 1573b of the right effect device 1500 are rotated. Can be contacted. By bringing the two sub-displays into contact, one image can be displayed across the two sub-displays and related images can be displayed. can do. Thus, it is possible to execute an effective display effect by the first sub display 480 and the second sub display 1580, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The operation in which the narrow frame portion 473b of the upper effect device 400 and the narrow frame portion 1573b of the right effect device 1500 are in contact with each other is referred to as “merging operation”. Are also included in the coalescing operation referred to here. In addition, when performing the union operation, the special 1 hold display LED 471, the special 2 hold display LED 1571, the special 1 4th symbol L
The display of ED472 and special 2 4th design LED1572 is made not to be shielded. Hereinafter, the combining operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 (B), 116 (A) and 116 (B).

In FIG. 115 (B), only the right effect device 1500 rotates 90 degrees clockwise (upward), so that the right effect device 1500 rises and the upper effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500 are narrow. A state in which the frame portion is in contact (polymerized in the front-rear direction) is shown (ascending uniting operation).

FIG. 116A shows that only the upper effect device 400 rotates 90 ° counterclockwise (downward), so that the upper effect device 400 descends, and the narrow frames of the upper effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500 are displayed. The state which the part contact | abutted is shown (falling uniting operation | movement).

FIG. 116 (B) shows that the right effect device 1500 rotates 45 ° clockwise (upward) and the upper effect device 400 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise (downward). 400 and the narrow frame part of the right part production | presentation apparatus 1500 have shown the state contact | abutted in the intermediate part (intermediate union operation | movement). In addition, the rotation angles of the top effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500 are 90 degrees in total.
For example, the upper stage production device 400 is 30 °, and the right side production device 1500.
May be rotated by 60 °. Further, the reliability of the big hit of the variable display game being executed may be notified according to the rotation angle of the upper effect device 400, or the rotation angle may be set according to the gaming state. .

Next, a mode in which the narrow frame portion 473b of the upper effect device 400 and the narrow frame portion 1573b of the right effect device 1500 abut will be described. 117A to 117E,
It is a figure explaining the aspect which the narrow frame part 473b of the top production | presentation apparatus 400 and the narrow frame part 1573b of the right part production | presentation apparatus 1500 contact | abut.

FIG. 117A shows an aspect in which the narrow frame portion 473b of the upper effect device 400 and the narrow frame portion 1573b of the right effect device 1500 are in contact with each other in the front and rear direction in the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG.

In the aspect shown in FIG. 117A, the front side of the narrow frame portion 473b of the upper effect device 400 and the rear side of the right effect device 1500 abut. By configuring in this way, the boundary width between the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 1580 becomes the width of the narrow frame portion 1573b of the right effect device 1500, so the display surface of the sub-display device It is possible to make it as close as possible, and it is possible to give a sense of unity of the sub display device. In particular, when one image is displayed across the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 1580, the divided width of the image can be narrowed, so that a higher effect can be obtained. . Note that the back side of the narrow frame portion 473b of the upper effect device 400 and the front side of the narrow frame portion 1573b of the right effect device 1500 may contact each other.

117B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the side surface of the top effect device 400 and the side surface of the right effect device 1500 abut on each other in the second embodiment of the present invention. In the mode shown in FIG. 117B, the hard magnetic body 401 and the right effect device 1 are provided on the side surface (the narrow frame portion 473b) of the upper effect device 400.
A soft magnetic body 1502 is disposed on the side surface of 500 (the narrow frame portion 1573b), and the decoration frame member 473 of the upper effect device 400 and the decoration frame member 1 of the right effect device 1500 are arranged.
By causing 573 to be attracted, misalignment is less likely to occur. Note that a hard magnetic material may be disposed on the side surface (the narrow frame portion 1573b) of the right portion rendering device 1500. Further, a magnetic shielding member may be disposed between the sub display device and the magnetic body to prevent the sub display device from being affected by the magnetic force. In this way, by regulating the positional deviation between the top effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity in the combined operation.

FIG. 117C is a diagram illustrating a mode in which the restriction portion 1502 is provided in the narrow frame portion 1573b of the right portion rendering apparatus 1500 in the second embodiment of the present invention. In the mode shown in FIG. 117C, the restriction portion 15 provided on the side surface (the narrow frame portion 1573b) of the right portion rendering device 1500.
02, the decoration frame member 473 of the upper effect device 400 and the decoration frame member 1573 of the right effect device 1500 are fitted to each other, thereby making it difficult for positional deviation to occur.
In addition, you may make it provide an upper production | presentation apparatus 400 with a control part. In addition, as shown in FIG. 117B, a magnetic body may be disposed on the side surface of each decorative frame member.

The restricting portion is formed in a groove portion that sandwiches the decorative frame member 473 of the upper effect device 400, and an inclined guide surface that is gradually narrowed on the bottom side of the groove portion is formed so as to be easily fitted. The depth of the groove is substantially the same as the width of the narrow frame portion 473b of the upper effect device 400, and is formed so as not to hide the display surface of the upper effect device 400.

In addition, you may make it provide a control part in the side surface (narrow frame part 473b) of the top production | presentation apparatus 400. FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 117B, a magnetic body may be disposed on the side surface of each decorative frame member.

FIG. 117D is a diagram illustrating a mode in which a decorative portion (shielding means) 1503 is provided on the side surface (the narrow frame portion 1573b) of the right effect rendering device 1500 in the second embodiment of the present invention. 117D, a gap for preventing damage is formed between the top effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500, and the decoration portion 1503 shields the gap (
Concealed) so that the player cannot see it. You may make it provide a decoration part in the side surface (narrow frame part 473b) of the top production | presentation apparatus 400. FIG.

FIG. 117E is a diagram showing a mode in which decorative portions (shielding means) 403 and 1503 are provided in both the upper effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500 in the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the mode shown in FIG. 117E, a gap for preventing breakage is formed between the top effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500, as in the mode shown in FIG. 117D. This gap is shielded (hidden) by 1503 so that the player cannot see it. By providing the decoration portions 403 and 1503 in both the upper effect device 400 and the right effect device 1500, it is possible to obtain an effect of preventing misalignment. By providing the decorative portion (shielding means) as described above, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity in the uniting operation.

[Left production device]
Next, the operation of the left effect device 2500 will be described. FIG. 118A shows the second of the present invention.
It is a figure explaining arrangement | positioning of the left part production | presentation apparatus 2500 and the lower raising / lowering unit 1100 of embodiment.

As described above, the left effect device 2500 is the rear surface side of the game board 32, the effect device unit 20
It is arranged between 0. The left effect device 2500 includes a third sub-display 2580 and is accommodated by a decorative frame member 2573. As shown in FIG. 118A, the left effect device 2500 is arranged so that a part of the right side of the decorative frame member 2573 overlaps the warp passage 112 when viewed from the player at the reference position.

Moreover, as shown to FIG. 118B, the left part production | presentation apparatus 2500 is comprised so that a slide to the right direction is possible. Further, when the left effect device 2500 slides to the center of the variable display device 35, as shown in FIG. 119, the motor 1102 (FIG. 119 (B)) with the vertical direction as an axis.
It is configured to be rotatable.

FIG. 118B is a diagram illustrating the sliding operation of the left effect device 2500 according to the second embodiment of this invention. FIG. 119 is a view for explaining the rotation operation of the left effect device 2500 according to the second embodiment of the present invention, (A) is a view of the rotation operation viewed from the front, and (B) is the rotation operation. It is the figure which looked at from the upper part.

The left effect device 2500 can be slid in the right direction on the front surface of the variable display device 35 from the reference position by the moving mechanism unit 1010 provided with the decorative member 1011.
Further, the moving mechanism unit 1010 is provided with a position detection SW 1020 for detecting the initial position of the left effect device 2500.

Moreover, when the left part production | presentation apparatus 2500 slides to the center of the fluctuation | variation display apparatus 35, as above-mentioned, it can rotate centering | focusing on a perpendicular direction. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), when moving to the vicinity of the center of the variable display device 35 and just above the lower lift unit 1100, it rotates in the right direction (counterclockwise in top view). Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), a display housing having a predetermined front-rear width is provided between the back surface of the game board 32 and the decorative member 229 provided on the front surface side of the back wall 211 of the unit base member 210. A space (standby space) 1160 is formed. The left effect device 2500 is at the reference position arranged in the display device accommodating space 1160,
The rotation is restricted by the game board 32 located in the front and the decorative member 229 located in the rear,
It cannot be rotated until it is face down.

On the other hand, when the left effect device 2500 slides and moves along the slide guide groove 1101 formed on the upper surface of the moving mechanism unit 1010 to the operation space 1150 located in front of the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 (close to the center), The back side (rear side) is widened by the thickness of the decorative member 229 and the back wall (211) of the unit base member 210, and the game board 32 is on the front side.
Since is not arranged, it is possible to rotate until it is face down. With this configuration, a limited space in the center frame 34 can be efficiently used.

Further, the display device accommodating space (standby space) 1160 may be configured to be swingable by sliding the left effect device 2500 so as to reciprocate in the left-right direction or rotating it so as to repeat reversal. . In this case, even if the left effect device 2500 is in the reference position, the swing is possible, and an effect that swings before the slide movement may be executed, or an effect that swings after the slide movement is executed. May be.

The left effect device 2500 includes a back light emitting unit 258 on the surface opposite to the third sub-display 2580.
1 is provided. For example, when the left effect device 2500 is rotating or when the left effect device 2500 is reversed (facing back), an effect of causing the back surface light emitting unit 2581 to emit light is executed. At this time, the left effect device 2500 may be swung in an inverted state (backward).

Next, a modified example of the left effect device 2500 will be described. FIG. 120A is a diagram illustrating a first modification of left effect device 2500 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In the first modified example, the width is wider than that of the left effect device 2500 of the present embodiment, and the display area of the third sub-display 2580 is divided into 2 on the left display area and the right display area with the warp passage 112 as a boundary. It is divided. At this time, the game board 32 is made of a transparent material, so that the player can visually recognize both the left and right areas, and different images can be displayed in each area.

Next, the 2nd which changed the accommodation position of left part production device 2500 when not carrying out slide movement
A modification will be described. FIG. 120B shows a left effect device 25 according to the second embodiment of this invention.
It is a figure explaining the 2nd modification of 00. FIG.

In the form shown in FIG. 119 (B), the left effect device 2500 that has not been slid is housed in the display housing space (standby space) 1160. In the second modification shown in FIG. A movable effect member 1180 that can receive a driving force from an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid and perform a predetermined effect operation is disposed in a space corresponding to the accommodation space 1160. At this time, by using a transparent member for the game board 32, the player can visually recognize the effect by the movable effect member 1180.

As shown in FIG. 120B, the left effect device 2500 is arranged on the back side of the warp channel 112 in a state rotated 90 ° from the slide direction. At this time, the board effect space 1170 is defined by the left effect device 2500, the decorative member 229, and the game board 32. The left effect device 2500 is accommodated so as to close the board effect space 1170 with the display surface 2580a of the third sub-display 2580 facing the center side of the variable display device (main display) 35. Therefore, since the back surface light emission part 2581 can illuminate the board back effect space 1170, the effect by the movable effect member 1180 can be heightened more. Further, the back light emitting unit 2581 itself can be visually recognized by shifting the line of sight to the left by the player.

[Lower production device]
Then, the production | presentation by the lower raising / lowering unit 1100 is demonstrated. Lower lifting unit 1
In the case of performing an effect by itself, 100 is a movable member and
The movable unit 1110 configured by the ED moves up and down. The lower lifting unit 11
00 can execute an effect linked with the left effect device 2500.

FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining effects by the left effect device 2500 and the lower lifting / lowering unit 1100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 121 (A) shows the left effect device 2500 reaching the center of the variable display device 35. A state of sliding movement, (B) shows a state in which an effect by the lower lift unit 1100 is executed after the left effect device 2500 rotates.

As shown in FIG. 121 (A), the left effect device 2500 of the present embodiment not only rotates about the vertical direction but also at the center of the third sub-display 2580 (counterclockwise in front view).
By rotating 90 °, the third sub-display 2580 can be changed from vertical display to horizontal display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), the third sub-display 2580 and the movable unit 1110 are brought into contact with each other by moving the movable unit 1110 up and down while the third sub-display 2580 is in the horizontal display. Perform a coalescing effect that touches or closes. At this time, by setting the maximum rising position of the movable unit 1110 to the lower side of the left effect device 2500, it is possible to execute the effect without blocking the display content of the third sub-display 2580.

(Image control unit)
Next, the image control unit 725 that controls the output of an image (video) to the main display and the sub display will be described. FIG. 122A shows an image control unit 72 according to the second embodiment of this invention.
5 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of FIG.

The image control unit 725 includes a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 720, a VDP 730 that performs image processing for video display on a display device in accordance with commands and data from the video control microcomputer 720, and control by the video control microcomputer 720. A PROM 703 for storing programs and data and an image ROM 704 for storing image data to be displayed on the display device are provided.

The video control microcomputer 720 receives a command related to video display from the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 710. An RTC (real time clock) 712 is connected to the main control microcomputer 710 so that date and time information can be acquired.

In this embodiment, the VDP 730 includes a main VDP 730 a that performs display control of the main display (variable display device) 35, and sub-displays (first sub-display 480, second sub-display 158).
0 and the third sub-display 2580), which performs display control of the sub-VDP 730b. The main VDP 730a has higher performance than the sub VDP 730b. Main VDP7
30a and sub-VDP 730b are configured to access a common image ROM 704, but each may have a dedicated image ROM.

In the VDP 730, a VRAM 731 (FIG. 4) that temporarily stores an image to be output to the display device.
4), and is configured to buffer the screen for one frame (see FIG.
Frame buffer). 122B is a diagram illustrating a screen buffered by the VDP 730 according to the second embodiment of this invention. FIG. 122A illustrates a main display, and FIG. 122B illustrates a sub display.

As shown in (A), the main image 3500 displayed on the main display (variable display device 35) includes an effective display area (visible area) 3500a and an invalid display area (invisible area) 3500b.
Consists of. The invalid display area (invisible area) 3500b is an area that the player cannot visually recognize because the outer peripheral portion of the display unit 35a is shielded by the unit base member 210, the decorative member 229, and the like. For example, this corresponds to the frame width of the housing member of the main display. The frame buffer for storing the main image 3500 has a horizontal / vertical ratio of 4: 3.

On the other hand, the image displayed on the sub-display is composed of the first sub-display image 3601, the second sub-display image 3602, and the third sub-display image 3603, and is processed in a lump or for each corresponding region. The frame buffer for storing the sub-display image has a horizontal / vertical ratio of 16
: 9 Further, the sizes of the sub display images are the same, and a corresponding area is extracted from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and the VDP 730 is extracted.
The image from which b is extracted is drawn (output) on each sub-display.

Subsequently, a modified example of the image control unit 725 will be described. In the image control unit 725 shown in FIG. 122A, the image processing that is output from all the sub-displays is performed by the sub-VDP 730b. However, in this modification, the main VDP 730a includes the main display 35 and the third sub-display. The image processing to be output to 2580 is executed, and the sub VDP 730b is the first sub display 480.
The image processing to be output to the second sub display 1580 is executed. FIG. 123A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an image control unit 725 according to a modification of the second embodiment of this invention. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 3B, the main VDP 730a includes a main display 35 and a third sub-display 258.
0, and the sub-VDP 730b includes a first sub-display 480 and a second sub-display 1580.
Connected to.

This modification corresponds to an aspect in which the third sub-display 2580 is divided into left and right as shown in FIG. 120A. FIG. 123B shows a VDP 730 according to a modification of the second embodiment of this invention.
FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating a screen buffered by the main display unit and a third display unit.
Sub-display 2580, (B) shows a first sub-display 480 and a second sub-display 1580.

The frame buffer processed by the main VDP 730a has a horizontal / vertical ratio of 16: 9.
It has become. In this modification, as shown in (A), the divided left third sub-display image 3
603a and the right third sub-display image 3603b are arranged in the vertical direction and an area is assigned, and the main image is assigned to the remaining area.

On the other hand, the frame buffer processed by the sub-VDP 730b has a horizontal / vertical ratio of 4:
The first sub display image 3601 and the second sub display image 3602 are assigned. In addition, an invalid display area (invisible area) 3605 is provided between the first sub display image 3601 and the second sub display image 3602. Invalid display area (invisible area) 36
The width of 05 corresponds to the width of the frame of the housing member between the display area of the first sub-display 480 and the display area of the second sub-display 1580. The first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 1580 that display an integral image across the combined operation are displayed on the same sub-VDP 73.
By controlling with 0b, efficient display control can be achieved.

The sub display processed by the main VDP 730a is the third sub display 258.
Not only 0 but other sub-displays may be used. For example, the main display 35 and the first sub display 480 may be processed by the main VDP 730a, or may be determined according to the screen size of each sub display.

[Screen display example]
Next, a screen display example by the main display and each sub-display will be described. FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining a screen display example by the main display and each sub-display according to the second embodiment of the present invention, in which (A) is in a normal gaming state and (B) is in a general power support state. Indicates. In addition, FIG.
In the screen display example shown in FIG. 4, the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure fluctuation display game. The same applies to the case where the variable display game that is the subject of execution changes between the normal game state and the general power support state even when the second special figure variable display game is not prioritized.

As shown in (A), in the normal gaming state, the first sub-display 480 provided in the upper effect device 400 and the second sub-display 1580 provided in the right effect device 1500 have independent effects. An image is displayed. Note that the image buffered in the frame buffer is an integrated effect image, but includes a case where it appears as an independent effect image when actually displayed.

Further, the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit 35a of the main display 35. A hold display area 1240 is assigned to the lower part of the display area of the display unit 35 a of the main display 35. The hold display area 1240 includes a special 1 hold display area 1240a for performing a hold display of the first special figure variable display game and a special 2 hold display area 1240b for performing a hold display of the second special figure variable display game. In the hold display area 1240, the display is held in order from the left to the oldest.

The third sub-display 2580 provided in the left effect device 2500 displays model information and information related to a regular effect executed at a predetermined time. As shown in FIGS. 122A and 123A, the effect control device 700 includes an RTC 715, and the remaining time until the regular effect is executed is displayed on the third sub-display 2580. Moreover, you may display the information explaining the aspect of the regular effect performed next time.

Further, as shown in (B), the variable display game is executed by the first sub-display 480 in the ordinary power support state. At this time, the movement of the top effect device 400 including the first sub-display 480 is restricted. By restricting the movement of the upper effect device 400, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the special figure variation display game and the prefetch notice from being hindered.

In the display area of the main display 35, a special 1 hold display area 1240a is allocated at the left end. Unlike the case of the normal gaming state, the hold display is made in the vertical direction from the top to the oldest. Note that, in the normal power support state, the second special figure fluctuation table game is preferentially executed, so that the visual recognition of the special 1 hold display area 1240a is restricted by the warp channel 112. By doing in this way, it becomes easy for a player to grasp that the first special figure variation display game is not prioritized.

Further, the special 2 reserved display area 1240b is allocated in the horizontal direction in the center of the display area of the main display 35, and is displayed in an enlarged manner as compared with the case of the normal gaming state. Special 2 hold display area 124
In 0b, the display is suspended from the right to the oldest. In this way, in the normal power support state (specific game state) in which start-up memory is likely to occur, the hold display area is expanded as compared to the normal game state, and further, the size of the hold display is expanded, so It is executed in an emphasizing manner in which the change becomes remarkable, and the prefetch effect in the specific gaming state can be impressed on the player.

Then, when the start-up memory is consumed at the start of the special figure variation display game, an effect that the hold display moves from the main display 35 to the second sub-display 1580 is executed. Then, the second sub display 1580 executes an effect related to the hold display. Thus, the interest of the special figure variation display game can be enhanced by executing the notice effect across the display devices.

Furthermore, a variable effect display area 1241 in which an effect related to the variable display game is executed is assigned to the area above the special 2 reserved display area 1240b. In addition, special 2 hold display area 1
A hold notice effect display area 1242 for executing a prefetch notice related to the hold display is assigned to the area below 240b. In the hold notice effect display area 1242, for example, a character appears and effects such as taking action on the hold display with high expectation are executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. Thus, in the production mode shown in (B), it is a mode specialized for the pre-reading notice.

Note that the display content of the third sub-display 2580 is the same as in the normal gaming state. Further, the execution subject of the variable display game (symbol change display) is changed according to the change in the game state, but the change of the execution subject may be the execution ratio (ratio) of the variable display game itself. That is, the execution rate of the variable display game on the main display 35 and the sub display 1580 is reversed between the normal game state and the specific game state.

As described above, it is possible to make it feel like a different game by executing a variable display game mainly using different displays according to the gaming state, and it is possible to effectively use a plurality of displays. It is possible to effectively improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125A, a modification of the display mode in the ordinary power support state will be described. FIG. 125A is a diagram illustrating a modification example of the screen display by the main display and each sub-display during the normal power support state according to the second embodiment of this invention. The contents of the production are almost the same as those shown in FIG. 124 (B), so the differences will be mainly described.

In the modification shown in FIG. 125A, the hold display of the second special figure variable display game (priority) is the main display 35, and the hold display (special 1 hold display area) of the first special figure variable display game (non-priority) is the first. Three sub-displays 2580 are used. The left stage production device 2500 including the third sub-display 2580 is located on the back side of the transparent game board 32, so it is a little difficult to see, but the second special figure variation display game has priority, so the player Makes it easier to grasp that the first special figure variation display game is not prioritized.

The display contents of the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 1580 are shown in FIG.
24 (B). In addition, although the first sub-display 480 is used as the variable display area, the main display 35 may be configured to integrally set the variable display area and the variable effect display area 1241.

Further, the case where the third sub-display 2580 is divided into left and right by the warp channel 112 will be described. FIG. 125B is a diagram illustrating a modification of the screen display by the third sub-display 2580 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

In this modification, the regular effect information and the model name are displayed in the divided left area of the third sub-display 2580 as in FIG. On the other hand, in the area on the right side, a simple number-of-holds display such as displaying the 4th symbol in the first and second special-figure variable display games and displaying the number of holds of each variable display game in numbers is performed.

Since the divided left area of the third sub-display 2580 is located on the back side of the transparent game board 32, the visibility is inferior to the right area. Therefore, in the left area,
Information (images) having low relevance to the variable display game, such as regular production information, is displayed. On the other hand, information (image) highly relevant to the variable display game is displayed in the right region with high visibility.
In addition, on the third sub-display 2580, “Pachinko / pachislot is something you can enjoy moderately”, etc.
You may display the image which suppresses euphoria, or may display information, such as game description and production description.

Next, a case where the special figure fluctuation display game is executed in the order of storage without giving priority to the second special figure fluctuation display game will be described. FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the screen display by the main display and each sub-display when the start-up memory is digested in the order of storage according to the second embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The state, (B), indicates that the power transmission support state is in progress.

In the normal gaming state, the hold display is made in the hold display area 1240 in the order of winning. Up to four start memories can be stored for each start winning opening, and a maximum of eight start memories are held from the right to the oldest. At this time, you may make it change the mode of a hold display for every start winning opening which won the prize. The display contents on the other main display units and sub-display units are the same as those in FIG.

In the normal power support state, the hold display area 1240 is assigned to the area to which the special 2 hold display area is assigned in FIG. 124 (B). In the hold display area 1240, the hold display is made in the oldest order from the right, and when the start-up memory is consumed, the effect that the hold display moves from the main display 35 to the second sub-display 1580 is executed. Further, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 124 (B), a variable effect display area 1241 is allocated above the hold display area 1240, and a hold notice effect display area 1242 is allocated below.

[Light emission status of hold display LED]
Next, the light emission modes of the special 1 hold display LED 471 provided in the upper effect device 400 and the special 2 hold display LED 1571 provided in the right effect device 1500 will be described. Each of the special 1 hold display LED 471 and the special 2 hold display LED 1571 is constituted by two LEDs, and notifies the number of hold of the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game according to the light emission mode. The special 1 hold display LED 471 indicates the number of reserved start memories for executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, and the special 2 hold display LED 1571 indicates the hold number of the start memory for executing the second special figure variable display game.

FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating an example of a light emission mode of the hold display LED according to the second embodiment of this invention. There are three types of light emission modes of the hold display LED in the present embodiment: “off”, “on”, and “blinking”. The number of reservations is indicated by a combination of the light emission modes of two LEDs.

As shown in FIG. 127, when the number of reservations is 0, both LEDs are turned on. Hold number is 1
In this case, one LED is turned on and the other is turned off. If the number of holds is 2, both L
Turn on the ED. When the number of holds is 3, one LED blinks and the other is lit. When the hold number is 4, both LEDs are blinked.

[Light emission state of 4th pattern LED]
Next, the light emission modes of the special 1 4th symbol LED 472 provided in the upper effect device 400 and the special 2 4th design LED 1572 provided in the right effect device 1500 will be described. The special 1 4th design LED 472 and the special 2 4th design LED 1572 are each constituted by two LEDs, and the execution status of the special figure variation display game is notified by the light emission mode. Special 1
The fourth symbol LED 472 is the execution state of the first special symbol variation display game, and the special two fourth symbol LED 157
2 shows the execution status of the second special figure variation display game.

FIG. 128A is a diagram illustrating an example of a light emission mode when the fourth symbol LED according to the second embodiment of the present invention indicates whether or not the special figure variation display game is being executed. In this case, the emission color of the LED may be one kind.

In the example shown in FIG. 128A, when the special figure variation display game is not being executed, both the two LEDs are lit. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation display game is running, two LEDs
Lights up alternately and blinks. The player can determine whether or not the special figure variation display game has ended by checking whether or not the fourth symbol LED is blinking.

In addition, an example will be described in which the result of the special-figure display game (disappear, small hit, big hit type) is displayed by a combination of the first symbol to the third symbol and the fourth symbol LED. 128B
These are figures which show the example of the light emission mode in the case of displaying the result of a special figure fluctuation display game by 4th design LED of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. In this case, the light emission colors of the LED are a plurality of types.

In the example shown in FIG. 128B, as described above, the fourth design LED is composed of two left and right LEDs, the left LED shows the result display at the time of the final temporary stop, and the right LED shows the result at the time of the final stop. Indicates the type of result.

More specifically, when the special figure variation display game is being executed, the emission color of the LED changes at a predetermined interval. When the special figure fluctuation display game ends, if the result is out of order, the LE on the left side
D goes off and the right LED emits white light. If the result is a small hit,
The ED and the right LED emit white light. If the result is normal hit, the left LE
D emits blue light, and the right LED emits light in a color other than white. Furthermore, when the result is a probability variation, the left LED emits red light, and the right LED emits light other than white.

[Production control processing]
Next, the 1st main process by the effect control device 700 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of 1st main processing executed by the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 710 of the presentation control device 700 according to the second embodiment of this invention. The difference from the first embodiment is that time information and the like are set in order to execute a regular effect, and the other processes are the same as those of the first embodiment.

Specifically, the main control microcomputer 710 starts the 1st main process, prohibits interruption (step B1001), and then executes the time information storage process (step B1020).
The time information storage process sets whether or not to execute a regular effect. Details of the time information storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. The time information storage process is executed only once when the power is turned on.

[Regular production time setting]
FIG. 130 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of time information storage processing according to the second embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the initialization switch signal is ON (step B7701). The initialization switch signal is input when the RAM is forcibly cleared by operating an initialization switch provided in the power supply device 800.

When the initialization switch signal is on (step B7)
If the result of 701 is “Y”), the reference date information for executing the regular performance is cleared (step B7710). Furthermore, a regular production invalid flag for invalidating the regular production is stored in the RAM 7.
11 (step B7711). Finally, the regular effect invalid notice information is set (step B7712), and the time information storage process is terminated. Note that the reference date information is information used for determining the production mode of the regular production.

On the other hand, if the initialization switch signal is not on (the result of Step B7701 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the reference date information for executing the regular performance is stored. Determination is made (step B7702). When the reference date information is not stored (the result of Step B7702 is “N”), the date information acquired from the RTC 715 is stored in the RAM 711 as the reference date information (Step B7703). The reference date information is newly stored when the power is turned on for the first time after the RAM is cleared. Further, the regular production invalid flag for invalidating the regular production is cleared (step B7704).

The main control microcomputer 710 acquires the date / time information from the RTC 715 after the reference date / time information is set or when the reference date / time information is stored (the result of step B7702 is “Y”). (Step B7705). The date information is a date (year / month / day) and time.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines a regular effect mode based on the reference date information and the date / time information acquired in the process of step B7705, and stores it in the RAM 711 (step B7706). The regular performance mode is determined based on the number of days elapsed from the reference date. An example of a table for determining the regular effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 131A.

FIG. 131A is a diagram showing an example of a regular effect mode determination table for determining the mode of a regular effect according to the second embodiment of this invention. The regular performance of this embodiment is determined based on the number of days that have elapsed since the reference date. As the reference date, the time when the power is first turned on after the RAM is cleared is set.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131A, the mode of the regular effect is switched from effect A to effect F every two weeks, and after 12 weeks, the effect A to effect F are sequentially executed for each regular effect. It has become. After 12 weeks, the player may be able to select the effect F from the effect A, or the player may be able to determine (customize) the effect for each regular effect.

Now, the description returns to the flowchart of the time information storage process of FIG. The main control microcomputer 710 determines the execution time of the regular effect based on the date / time information acquired in step B7705, and stores it in the execution information storage area of the RAM 711 (step B7707).
An example of the execution information storage area for storing the execution time of the regular effects will be described with reference to FIG. 131B.

FIG. 131B is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the execution information storage area for the regular effects according to the second embodiment of this invention. In the execution information storage area of the regular production, the number of regular productions indicating the execution times of the regular production, the execution time corresponding to the number of regular productions, and the production mode to be executed are stored. FIG.
In 1B, information is stored with the power-on time being 09: 00: 1.28 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the number of regular effects is six times a day, but the number may be reduced depending on the power-on time. The execution time is updated every time the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, the execution time is defined to be executed every two hours with reference to the time when the power is turned on. The execution time is determined and stored in the process of step B7706. In addition, by using the power-on time as a reference, it is possible to perform a regular effect so that a plurality of gaming machines (same model) that are powered on at the same time are synchronized.

Furthermore, the effect mode is determined by the process of step B7706 based on the date information.
It should be noted that the production mode of each regular production is not uniquely determined by the number of days elapsed from the reference date, but the production mode executed at each regular production by operating the production button 17 when waiting for a customer, etc. May be arbitrarily set (customized) by the player. In addition, when making a player arbitrarily set (customize), you may make it select from the aspect of execution performed in the past, and a player's personal game history (game frequency, mission achievement level, etc.) ) May be selected according to the production mode.

Now, the description returns to the flowchart of the time information storage process of FIG. Finally, the main control microcomputer 710 sets the regular effect valid notification information (step B7708) and ends the time information storage process. In addition, about the regular production | presentation effective alert information set by the process of step B7708, and the regular effect invalid alert | report information set by the process of step B7712,
This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example of the regular effect notification information according to the second embodiment of this invention.
A) is regular production invalid notice information, and (B) is regular production valid notice information.

The regular production invalidity notification information is displayed when the RAM clear is executed (initialization switch signal is input), and specifically, is displayed after the time information storage process is executed or when a power-on command is received. .

The regular effect valid notification information is displayed when the power is restored without executing the RAM clear (normal restoration at the time of power failure), or when all the models are turned on at the same time. Displayed after executing the information storage process or when receiving a power failure recovery command.

Next, the procedure for actually executing the regular effects will be described. The regular effect is executed at a preset time as described above. FIG. 133 shows a first embodiment of the present invention.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of st scene control processing. In the 1st scene control process of the second embodiment, a regular effect execution process (step B1323) for executing a regular effect is added to the processes included in the 1st scene control process of the first embodiment. .

The regular effect execution process is executed at the end of the 1st scene control process, and compares the current time with the execution start time of the regular effect to execute the regular effect or to control the regular effect being executed. Details of the regular effect execution process will be described with reference to FIG.

[Pending notice]
Next, pre-reading notice (hold notice) by hold display will be described. The hold notice in the present embodiment is different between the normal gaming state and the general power support state. In the general power support state, in addition to changing the hold display, a sub-display is used or a character appears. First, the hold notice control will be described.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a hold notice control process according to the second embodiment of this invention. The hold advance notice control process is executed in the prior determination command reception process (step B1320) in the 1st scene control process. In addition, the prior determination in the game control device 600 is executed for the start memory of the first special figure variation display game in the normal gaming state and the start memory of the second special figure variation display game in the normal power support state. Therefore, the prior determination command is also transmitted in this case.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not pre-determination information for executing the pre-reading notice is received (step B8001). The advance determination information is included in the advance determination command. If the main control microcomputer 710 has not received the advance determination information (the result of Step B8001 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 executes the processing after Step B8007.

The main control microcomputer 710 receives the prior determination information (step B800).
1 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step B80).
02). If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (the result of step B8002 is “Y”)
) And the display mode of the hold display is determined based on the variation pattern information (step B8003).
. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (the result of Step B8002 is “Y”)
) That is, in the case of the ordinary power support state, the display mode of the hold display is determined based on the result of the variable display game and the variable pattern information (step B8004).

Thereafter, the main control microcomputer 710 determines the notice mode of the hold notice based on the display form and the number of reserved memories determined in the process of Step B8003 or Step B8004 (Step B8005). Further, the display mode and the notice mode after determination are stored in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B8006).

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 performs a hold display update process for updating the hold display or executing the hold notice effect based on the display mode and the notice mode stored in the hold storage area ( Step B8007).

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a special gaming state has occurred (step B8008). If a special gaming state has occurred (the result of step B8008 is “Y
”), The hold notice information corresponding to the hold memory for executing the first special figure variation display game is cleared (step B8009).

Note that when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the general power support state, the prefetch notice corresponding to the start memory of the first special figure variation display game is cleared, but when transitioning from the general power support state to the normal gaming state In addition, the pre-reading notice corresponding to the start memory of the first special figure variation display game is continued without being cleared.

Subsequently, a mode of change of the hold display will be described. FIGS. 135A and 135B are diagrams for explaining a notice mode of a hold display according to the second embodiment of the present invention, in which FIG. 135A shows an aspect for each gaming state, and FIG. Show.

First, a notice for changing the color of the hold display in the normal gaming state and the general power support state will be described with reference to (A). The color of the hold display is “white” → “blue” → “yellow” → “red”
→ It is set so that the expectation of the big hit is higher in the order of “rainbow”. “Rainbow” is a big hit.

In the normal game state, as described above, the start memory of the first special figure variation display game is targeted.
In addition, in the ordinary power support state, the start memory of the second special figure variation display game is targeted. In any state, when the hold notice is executed, first, the hold display indicating the start-up memory is temporarily changed at the timing when the hold display is made. In this case, the color may change, or “?” May be displayed on the hold display to change to indicate that there is a hold notice.

Furthermore, after the hold display is made, the color of the hold display can be changed every time the special figure variation display game is executed. That is, if the number of holds is 4, the color changes at the time of starting winning, and thereafter, the color of the hold display may change every time the preceding three special figure variation display games are executed. The color shown in (A) is a color that finally changes, and is the color at the time when the start memory of the special figure variation display game executed in advance is exhausted. In the normal gaming state, the color of the hold display does not become “rainbow” regardless of the result of the special figure variation display game. In addition, in the ordinary power support state, the color that changes depends on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of place, the rainbow is displayed. It does not change and does not change to “white” in the case of winning.

(B)-(F) is a table | surface which shows the color of the pending | holding display which changes at the timing at which the special figure fluctuation display game performed previously is started. Referring to each table, in principle, the color is set so as to increase the degree of expectation. For example, if the number of holds is 4 and the hold display is “
In the case of “red”, the color changes in the order of “white → blue → yellow → red” or “? ⇒white → blue → red”.

Also, as shown in FIG. 124 (B) and the like, when the special figure variation display game based on the start memory subject to the hold notice is executed in the ordinary power support state, the second sub-display 1580 is used. The hold effect is executed as the middle hold effect region. For example, as shown in (A), “☆” is displayed according to the expectation level that the variable display game is won or the expectation level that is a reach. When the degree of expectation is high, it may be displayed so that the number of “☆” increases, or the type of “☆” displayed may be changed.

FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending notice in the normal gaming state according to the second embodiment of this invention. In (A) to (H), an identification symbol and a hold display area are shown.

(A) shows a state immediately after the special figure variation display game is finished. In the normal gaming state, the hold display is made from the left to the oldest, so the hold display corresponding to the latest start memory is “?
"

(B) shows a state in which the start memory is digested and a special figure variation display game is newly started. The leftmost start memory in (A) has been consumed, and the hold display of the latest start memory that has been displayed as “?” Has changed to “white”.

In (C), the special figure fluctuation display game executed in (B) is ended, and in (D), the next special figure fluctuation display game is started. In (D), one new start memory is added. In addition, the hold display of the start memory whose hold display is “?” In (A) has changed to “yellow”, and since all of the preceding start memories have been consumed, it becomes the final hold notice.

In (E), the special figure fluctuation display game executed in (D) ends. At this time, one new start memory is further added, and the hold display is “blue”. In (F), a variable display game based on the start memory (the start memory of “yellow” in (D)) in which the hold display is “?” In (A) is started. At this time, the hold display of the start memory whose hold display is “blue” in (E) has changed to “yellow”.

Thereafter, as shown in (G), the result of the special figure variation display game executed in (F) is a big hit, and the special gaming state is started as shown in (H). When the special game state is started, the hold notice information is cleared (step B8009 in FIG. 134) as described in the hold notice control process, and the hold display is returned to normal (“white”).

FIGS. 137 to 139 are diagrams for explaining an example of the hold notice in the normal power support state according to the second embodiment of this invention. In (A) to (T), display contents of the main display 35, the first sub display 480, and the second sub display 1580 are shown.

As described above, in the ordinary power support state, the special figure fluctuation display game (the identification information fluctuation display) is executed mainly by the first sub-display 480, and the effect image related to the special figure fluctuation display game is the main display. It is displayed in the change effect display area 1241 at the upper stage of the device 35. Main display 35
In the middle, a special 2 hold display area 1240b is allocated, and the starting memory is digested in order from the right. Then, if the start memory is digested, the second sub-display 158
The hold display is displayed so as to move to 0 (special 2 digestion hold effect area), and an effect corresponding to the degree of expectation is executed.

Further, a hold notice effect display area 1242 is assigned to the lower part of the main display 35, and a character performs an action on the hold display in the special 2 hold display area 1240b to make a hold notice.

(A) is a state in which the special symbol variation display game is finished and the identification symbol is stopped and displayed on the first sub-display 480. Then, the start memory is digested, and the effect that the start memory displayed at the right end moves to the second sub-display 1580 is executed. At this time, although the advance notice auxiliary character is displayed in the special 2 hold display area, the start memory that is displayed on hold is not expected to be high or the hold notice is not performed, so only the movement to the left and right is repeated. It has become.

(B) has shown the state by which the special figure change display game based on the start memory digested by (A) was started. When the special figure variation display game is started, the digestion pending effect is executed in the special 2 digestion pending effect area, and an effect corresponding to the degree of expectation is executed. Specifically, an effect including display of a star (☆) in a mode corresponding to the degree of expectation is executed.

(C) shows a state in which start memory is newly added during execution of the special figure variation display game. At this time, a notice assisting character stops under the hold display of the newly added start memory, and informs the player that the degree of expectation may be high.

Thereafter, in (D), the special figure variation display game being executed is completed, and the earliest start memory is digested. Then, the hold display moves to the right, and the notice assisting character moves accordingly. Thereafter, as shown in (E), when the special figure variation display game is started, the notice assisting character takes action, and the color of the hold display changes from “white” to “blue”. Then, the continuous notice image 1 is displayed in the change effect display area 1241 instead of the normal change effect image.

(F) is a state in which a start memory is newly added during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and becomes “?” At the time of the hold display. At this time, the number of notice assisting characters increases to two,
The increased notice assist character is also displayed under the new start memory hold display.

(G) ends the special figure variation display game being executed, and then the earliest startup memory is digested, and in (H), a new special figure variation display game is started. And each notice auxiliary character takes action at the timing of the start of change, and changes the mode of the hold display. At this time, the continuous notice image 2 is displayed in the change effect display area 1241.

Subsequently, when the special figure variation display game being executed in (I) is finished and the variation display of the identification symbol is stopped, the notice assisting character becomes one person. And as shown in (J), “Yellow” with high expectation
The start memory of the hold display is digested.

(K) shows a state in which the special figure variation display game based on the start storage of the “yellow” hold display is started. When the start-up memory is digested, an effect is displayed in which three “☆” are displayed in the reserved effect area during digestion. Further, the continuous notice image 3 is displayed in the change effect display area 1241. In addition, the start-up memory in which the notice assisting character takes action and the hold display is “?” Is changed to “white”.

Then, as shown in (L), the variable display game continues and the left symbol stops, and as shown in (M), reach (SP reach) occurs. During this time, a new start-up memory is generated and “?”
A hold display has been added. At this time, the special 2 hold display area 1240b is lowered to the lower level, the hold notice effect display area 1242 disappears, the change effect display area 1241 is expanded, and a reach effect image (SP reach effect) is displayed. Note that the hold notice effect display area 1242 may be reduced without disappearing.

Thereafter, as shown in (N), the identification symbols all stop at “2”, and the variable effect display area 1
At 241, an effect indicating that a big hit has occurred is executed. During this period, a new start-up memory is generated and a “white” hold display is added.

After the big win of the special figure variation display game is confirmed, as shown in (0), a symbol re-lottery is performed. At this time, the special 2 reserved display area 1240b disappears and the variable effect display area 1241 is expanded, and a re-lottery effect image is displayed across the main display 35 and the first sub-display 480. Then, as shown in (P), the identification symbol stops at the main display 35 with the probability variation symbol,
The result of the special figure change display game is finalized. At this time, the first sub-display 480 displays information indicating that it is a probable big hit. When the re-lottery is started, the second sub-display 1
In 580, the effect image related to the re-lottery is displayed instead of the pending effect during digestion.

(Q) is a state in which a special game state (a big hit state) is entered and an effect during the big hit is being executed. At this time, the big hit image is displayed on the first sub-display 480. Then, when the predetermined round ends, an ending image is displayed as shown in (R), and the special gaming state ends.

Thereafter, as shown in (S), the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory is executed in the ordinary power support state (high probability state). Further, as described in the hold notice control process (FIG. 134), the hold notice for the start memory of the second special figure variable display game is not cleared even if a special gaming state occurs. It continues after the figure change display game is resumed. Therefore, as shown in (S) and (T), the hold notice for the start-up memory in which the hold display generated before the start of the special gaming state is “?” Continues, and the hold notice effect display area 1242 is provided with the notice assistance. Characters appear and productions such as taking action are performed.

As described above, by making the auxiliary notice character appear in the ordinary power support state, the prefetch notice can be further emphasized, and the production effect can be improved. Although the color of the hold display is changed, the character may be changed using the hold display as a character. Further, the notice assisting character may be caused to cause an action by operating the effect button 17.

[Regular production execution processing]
FIG. 140 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a regular effect execution process according to the second embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 acquires time information from the RTC 715 (step B).
7801). And based on the acquired time information, it is determined whether it is a regular production start time (step B7802). If it is not the regular production start time (step B7802
The result of step B7807 and subsequent steps is executed. Step B780
In the first process, it is determined based on the time information acquired from the RTC 715 that it is the start time of the regular effect. However, the effect control device 700 measures the time based on the time information acquired when the power is turned on. It may be determined that it is the start time of the regular production based on the time.

The main control microcomputer 710, when the regular production start time comes (step B7802).
Is "Y"), the production mode (A to F) is acquired from the execution information storage area of the regular production (step B7803). Furthermore, the regular production execution time corresponding to the production mode is set in the regular production timer (step B7804). The regular production execution time may be included in the regular production mode determination table, or may be stored in a dedicated correspondence table.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 includes a first sub-display 480 and a second sub-display 158.
At 0, execution of the regular effect is started (step B7805). In the regular performance, video (image) is displayed on the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 1580, and the speaker 10
To output audio. As described above, the regular effect is performed on the sub display (the first sub display 480 and the second sub display 1580) in preference to the notice effect, thereby preventing the execution of the variable display game on the main display 35. There is no.

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 includes a first sub-display 480 and a second sub-display 158.
An effect restriction flag for restricting the notice effect by 0 is set (step B7806).
.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the regular production is being performed (step B).
7807). If the regular production is being performed (the result of step B7807 is “Y”), the regular production timer is updated by −1 (step B7815). Then, it is determined whether or not the regular effect timer has reached 0 (step B7816). If the regular effect timer reaches 0 (the result of step B7815 is “Y”), the regular effect execution process is terminated.

If the regular effect timer is not 0 (step B), the main control microcomputer 710
The result of 7816 is “N”), and an effect (display and sound) corresponding to the periodic effect timer is acquired (step B7817). And the acquired effect is performed (step B7818), and a regular effect execution process is complete | finished.

On the other hand, if the regular control microcomputer 710 is not in the periodical presentation (the result of step B7807 is “N”), the first sub-display 480 (upper presentation apparatus 400) and the second sub-display 15
The restriction flag of the notice effect including the movement of 80 (right part effect device 1500) is cleared (step B7808). Further, the inversion restriction flag that restricts the inversion (inversion) of the third sub-display 2580 (left part rendering device 2500) is cleared (step B7809).

Then, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not it is 3 minutes before the regular production (step B7810), and if 3 minutes ago (the result of step B7812 is “Y”), sets the reverse restriction flag. (Step B7811). Third sub-display 2580 from 3 minutes before the regular performance
By restricting the reversal (conversion to the face-down state), it is possible to avoid a situation in which the remaining time until the start of the regular production displayed on the third sub-display 2580 becomes invisible when the execution of the regular production is near. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the remaining time until the start of the regular effect every time the specific effect is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent the player who is looking forward to the execution of the regular performance (specific performance) from feeling dissatisfied, and to improve the interest of the game.

While the regular presentation is executed on the main display 35, the decoration variation display game is executed on the first sub-display 480 and / or the second sub-display 1580 so that the main display 35 is not shielded during the regular presentation. You may restrict | limit execution of the production | presentation accompanying the movement of a 1st-3rd sub-display (480, 1580, 2580). By comprising in this way, it can prevent that the visual recognition of the regular effect performed with the main indicator 35 is inhibited.

Further, in the customer waiting state, in order to suppress wasteful power consumption, the state in which the state is shifted to the eco (energy saving) display mode may be maintained and the regular presentation may not be executed. Also,
On the contrary, when waiting for a customer, the main display 35 and the sub display (480, 158).
0, 2580) may be executed at regular intervals.

Further, when the regular effect starts or ends, the third sub-display 2580 can be reversed, so that the effect of the effect by the third sub-display 2580 can be minimized.

[Fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the changing process (step B1311) in the first scene control process described above will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the changing process according to the second embodiment of this invention. Note that description of processing that is common to the processing in change of the first embodiment illustrated in FIG. 84 is omitted.

When the production request flag is set (the result of step B1501 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 performs the variation production pattern setting process (step B1504).
Then, an operation notice effect setting process for setting the content (effect form) of the notice effect corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game and the change (effect) pattern is executed (step B1520). Details of the operation announcement effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. The processing after step B1506 is the same as that in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, when the effect request flag is not set (the result of step B1501 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the scene update timer has become 0 (step B1511). When the scene update timer reaches 0 (the result of step B1511 is “Y”), that is, in the case of scene switching timing, the next scene data set in the scene sequence table is set (step B1512).

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 includes each effect device (upper effect device 4) provided with a sub-display.
00, the right effect device 1500, the left effect device 2500). Specifically, a combined announcement effect execution process (step B1521), a development (implying) notice effect execution process (step B1522), a step-up notice effect execution process (step B1523), and a lift notice effect execution process (step B1524) are executed. Is done. Details of the merge notice effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 144 to 150. Details of the development (suggestion) notice effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. Details of the step-up notice effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 to 166. Details of the up / down notice effect execution processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 172.

[Operation warning effect setting process]
Next, an operation notice effect setting process for setting a notice effect of the special figure variation display game will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the operation notice effect setting process according to the second embodiment of the present invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 sets a notice selection table corresponding to the variation (effect) pattern (step B8101). The notice selection table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example of the notice selection table according to the second embodiment of this invention. In the notice selection table shown in FIG. 143, notice contents corresponding to all the variation (effect) patterns are defined together with the selection rate. In the process of step B8101, data corresponding to the variation (effect) pattern is extracted and set. Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines the type of notice effect to be executed from the set notice selection table (step B8102).

Then, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not to execute the union notice (step B).
8103), in the case of executing (the result of Step B8103 is “Y”), the united notice mode setting process is executed (Step B8104). Details of the merge notice mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice (step B8).
105) If it is to be executed (the result of step B8105 is “Y”), a development notice mode setting process is executed (step B8106). Details of the advance notice mode setting process are shown in FIG.
This will be described later at 44.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not to execute a step-up (SU) notice (step B8107), and if so (the result of step B8107 is “Y”).
Then, step-up (SU) notice mode setting processing is executed (step B8108). Details of the step-up (SU) notice mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice (step B8).
109) When executing (the result of step B8109 is “Y”), the raising / lowering notice mode setting process is executed (step B8110). For details of the elevation notice mode setting process, refer to FIG.
This will be described later at 67.

[Coalition notice effect]
Next, various notice effects will be described. First, the merge notice effect will be described. The combined announcement effect is an effect in which the upper effect device 400, the right effect device 1500, and the left effect device 2500 are combined. Of these three types of effect devices, any two types of effect devices may be combined, or three types of effect devices may be combined. In addition, all of the plurality of effect devices may move and merge, or some effect devices may move and merge with an effect device that does not move.

[Coalition notice effect setting processing]
FIG. 144 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the united advance notice setting process according to the second embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not an effect restriction flag is set (step B8201). The production restriction flag is set at the start of the regular production executed on the main display 35 (step B7806 in FIG. 140). When the production restriction flag is set (the result of step B8201 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 does not execute the combined announcement production because the production accompanying the movement of the production device is regulated. This process ends.

On the other hand, when the production restriction flag is not set (the result of step B8201 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the mode selection table according to the gaming state (step B8203). The notice mode corresponding to the variation (effect) pattern is determined from the mode selection table (step B8203). In the mode selection table, the mode of the coalescence effect according to the variation (effect) pattern is defined. The aspect selection table will be described with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 145A and 145B are diagrams for explaining a merger effect mode according to the second embodiment of the present invention, where FIG. 145A is a mode selection table in a normal gaming state, FIG. 145B is a mode selection table in a general power support state, C) shows a table showing the correspondence between the contents of each operation mode and the reliability.

First, the outline of the rendering operation will be described with reference to (C). In this embodiment, 13 types of performance operations are set according to the reliability, and the first to third performance operations have low reliability.
The fourth to eleventh performance operations are set so that the reliability is medium, and the twelfth and thirteenth performance operations are set to have high reliability. In addition, the rendering operation is set such that the higher the reliability, the greater the operation of each sub-display.

The first to third effect operations are only the swinging of the sub display. The fourth to eleventh performance operations are the first
Sub display 480 (upper effect device 400) or second sub display 1580 (right effect device 1)
500) move and unite. In the twelfth and thirteenth effect operations, an intermediate merging operation in which both the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 1580 are moved is executed. Details of these combining operations will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. Note that any one of the fourth to thirteenth effect operations for performing the coalescing operation may be a jackpot-fixed effect operation.

Referring to (A), a highly reliable presentation operation is set corresponding to a highly reliable variation pattern. For example, when the variation pattern is equal to or less than the normal reach, only the presentation operation in which the sub display swings is performed. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern of SP2 reach or higher with high reliability,
An effect operation in which either one or both of the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 1580 moves is selected.

On the other hand, in the normal power support state, the special figure variation display game is executed on the first sub-display 480, so that the rendering operation on which the first sub-display 480 operates is not selected. (
Referring to B), when a variation pattern with low reliability is selected, the variation time is set to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variation pattern is less than normal reach, the second sub-display 1580 Only the swinging second effect operation is selected. On the other hand, in the variation pattern of SP1 reach or higher, the eighth or tenth effect operation in which the second sub display 1580 moves is selected.

Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, it is difficult to select a performance operation with low reliability, and it is easy to select a performance operation with high reliability. On the other hand, in the case of detachment, it is easy to select a performance operation with low reliability, and it is difficult to select a performance operation with high reliability. The production operation with medium reliability is set so that the production operation with low reliability and the production operation with high reliability are executed in a balanced manner.

Now, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. When the notice mode of the combined notice effect is determined, the main control microcomputer 710 determines the execution timing (notice timing) of the combined notice effect from a plurality of execution timings according to the result of the special figure variation display game ( Step B
8204). The execution timing of the combined announcement effect may be, for example, before the occurrence of reach when the result of the special figure change display game is out of place, or after the occurrence of reach when the result is a big hit.

Further, main control microcomputer 710 determines the type of display image to be displayed on first sub-display 480 and second sub-display 1580 from the plurality of display images according to the notice mode and notice timing of the combined notice effect. (Step B8205). Finally, steps B8203 to B8
The execution information of the union notice corresponding to the matter determined in 205 is set (step B820).
6). Thereafter, a coalescence notice is executed based on the set execution information (step B1521 in FIG. 141).

In addition, when it is comprised so that only one of the 1st sub indicator 480 or the 2nd sub indicator 1580 may perform a regular effect, even if it is during execution of a regular effect, the regular effect is not performed. You may make it perform about the unification notice which operates (moves) a sub-display.

[Example of coalescence notice effect]
Subsequently, a specific example of the union notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. further,
A modification will be described with reference to FIG. Finally, an example of a three-body combination notice that combines three types of sub-displays will be described.

FIGS. 146 and 147 are diagrams illustrating an example of the combined announcement effect according to the second embodiment of this invention. FIG. 146 and FIG. 147 (A) are common, and show the state before the special notice variation display game is being executed and before the combined notice effect is being executed. Here, typical four types of effect operations will be described. Note that these effects may be executed before the occurrence of reach or after the occurrence of reach. In this way, by executing the combined notice effect in front of the main display 35 when executing the special figure fluctuation display game, the interest of the special figure fluctuation display game can be improved.

First, an example in which the swung sub-display moves and merges ((A) → (B1) → (C1), first
Will be described. In this case, when the united advance notice is started, as shown in (B1), the second sub-display 1580 swings (executes a sign effect that makes the united operation sense). At this timing, an independent effect image is displayed on each display. The sign effect is also referred to as a movement suggesting effect that suggests the movement of the display.

Thereafter, as shown in (C1), the oscillated second sub-display 1580 is rotated, and the ascending and merging operation is executed. When the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 1580 are combined, an effect image (usually an integrated image) that displays the display portions of the respective displays together as one screen is displayed. At this time, if the VDP for controlling the image output of each sub-display unit is common, it is not necessary to perform synchronization between the VDPs, so that control becomes easier.

Next, an example in which a sub-display different from the swung sub-display moves and merges ((A) → (B
2) → (C2), corresponding to the sixth effect operation) will be described. In this case, when the uniting notice is started, as shown in (B2), the second sub-display 1580 swings (executes a sign effect (movement suggesting effect) for predicting the uniting operation). At this timing, an independent effect image is displayed on each display. The coalescence notice is started after the reach has occurred.

Thereafter, as shown in (C2), the first sub-display 480 that is not swinging is rotated, and the descending and combining operation is executed. When the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 1580 are combined, an effect image (usually an integrated image) that displays the display portions of the respective displays together as one screen is displayed. As described above, since there is a contradictory pattern in which the effect device that is not the swaying effect device moves because of the normal pattern that the swaying effect device moves, it is possible to surprise the player.

Next, both sub-indicators swing and one sub-indicator moves and merges ((A) →
(B3) → (C3), corresponding to the eleventh effect operation) will be described. In this case, when the merge notice is started, as shown in (B3), the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 158 are displayed.
0 swings (executes an indication effect (movement suggestion effect) that predicts a coalescing operation). At this timing, an independent effect image is displayed on each display.

Thereafter, as shown in (C3), the second sub-display 1580 is rotated and the assembling operation is performed. When the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 1580 are combined, an effect image (usually an integrated image) that displays the display portions of the respective displays together as one screen is displayed.

Finally, an example where both sub-indicators swing and both sub-indicators move and merge ((A)
→ (B4) → (C4), corresponding to the 13th effect operation) will be described. In this case, when the merge notice is started, as shown in (B4), the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 15
80 swings (executes a sign effect (movement suggesting effect) for presuming the union operation). At this time,
In addition to independent effect images on each display device, related effect images may be displayed. Moreover, even if it is except intermediate | middle union operation | movement, you may make it display the production image relevant on each indicator.

Thereafter, as shown in (C4), the first sub-display unit 480 and the second sub-display unit 1580 are rotated, and the intermediate uniting operation is executed. In the intermediate coalescence operation, the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 480
The sub display 1580 is rotated by 45 ° and united in a state of being inclined in front of the main display 35. At this time, an effect image in which one display unit of each display unit is combined is displayed, but in this embodiment, a special integrated image is displayed as a premier effect instead of a normal integrated image.
As described above, by displaying the integrated image corresponding to the mode of the combined operation of the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 1580, it is possible to further enhance the effect.

Subsequently, as a modification of the present embodiment, the second sub-display 1580 and the third sub-display 258 are used.
An example in which 0 is combined will be described. FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining a modification example of the union announcement effect according to the second embodiment of this invention.

First, an example ((A) → (B1) → (C1)) in which the swung sub-display moves and merges will be described. In this case, when the united advance notice is started, as shown in (B1), the third sub-display 2580 swings (executes an indication effect that makes the united operation sense). At this time, related effect images are displayed on the second sub-display 1580 and the third sub-display 2580, and independent effect images are displayed on the first sub-display 480.

Thereafter, as shown in (C1), the oscillated third sub-display 2580 slides to the right, and the uniting operation is executed. When the second sub-display 1580 and the third sub-display 2580 are combined, an effect image (usually an integrated image) that displays the display portions of the respective displays together as one screen is displayed.

Next, an example in which both sub-displays swing, move and merge ((A) → (B2) → (C2)
). When the coalescence notice starts after the reach occurs, as shown in (B2)
The second sub-display 1580 and the third sub-display 2580 swing (execute a sign effect (movement suggesting effect) for predicting the uniting operation). At this time, related effect images are displayed on the second sub-display 1580 and the third sub-display 2580, and independent effect images are displayed on the first sub-display 480.

Thereafter, as shown in (C2), the second sub-display 1580 is in the left direction, the third sub-display 2
580 slides to the right and the coalescing operation is executed. When the second sub-display 1580 and the third sub-display 2580 are moved together and combined, the effect image is displayed as a single screen by combining the display units of the respective displays. In this case, since a plurality of sub-displays are moving, a special integrated image is displayed.

Furthermore, as a modification of the present embodiment, a first sub-display 480, a second sub-display 1580
An example in which the third sub-display 2580 is combined will be described. The three mergers are executed as a premier effect. FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating a first modified example of a combined announcement effect in which all of the three types of sub-displays according to the second embodiment of the present invention are combined.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 149, the second sub display 1580 does not move, and after the first sub display 480 rotates downward, the third sub display 2580 slides to the right. At this time, the third sub-display 2580 includes a first sub-display 480 and a second sub-display 1580.
Located behind. When all the sub-displays are combined, an effect image (special integrated image) is displayed in which the display units of the respective displays are combined into one screen.

FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining a second modification of the combined announcement effect in which all of the three types of sub-displays according to the second embodiment of the present invention are combined.

In the second modified example shown in FIG. 150, after performing the intermediate merging operation between the first sub-display 480 and the second sub-display 1580, the third sub-display 2580 slides to the right,
Rotate 45 ° counterclockwise. At this time, the third sub-display 2580 is connected to the first sub-display 4
80 and the second sub-display 1580. When all the sub-displays are combined, an effect image (special integrated image) is displayed in which the display units of the respective displays are combined into one screen.

In the modification shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the frame portions are arranged so as to be positioned behind the third sub-display 2580, the first sub-display 480, and the second sub-display 1580. However, it may be located in the front or may be arranged so that the side surfaces of the frame portion are aligned without overlapping. In addition, even in the case of a three-body combination, a normal integrated image may be displayed without a premier effect.

[Development (implying) notice effect]
Next, the development (suggestion) notice effect will be described. In the development (suggestion) notice effect, the left effect device 2500 slides forward in front of the main display 35, and the third sub-display 2580 notifies (suggests) the development (progression mode) of the variable display game being executed. Production.

[Development (implying) notice effect setting processing]
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the development (suggestion) notice effect setting process according to the second embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not an inversion restriction flag is set (step B8301). The inversion restriction flag is set from 3 minutes before the start of the regular effect until the end (step B7811 in FIG. 140). If the reversal restriction flag is not set (the result of Step B8301 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 further determines whether or not it is in the normal power support state (Step B8302).

If the main control microcomputer 710 is not in the normal power support state (the result of step B8302 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the mode selection table 1 as a table for selecting a development notice mode according to the gaming state ( Step B8303). Details of the mode selection table 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 determines that the reverse restriction flag is set (step B).
If the result of 8301 is “Y”), or if the power transmission support state is set (step B830)
If the result of 2 is “Y”), the mode selection table 2 is set as a table for selecting the mode of advance notice (step B 8303). Details of the mode selection table 2 are shown in FIG.
This will be described with reference to 2 (B).

FIGS. 152A and 152B are diagrams for explaining the mode of development (suggestion) notice effect according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 152A is a mode selection table in the normal gaming state and the invertible state, and FIG. A mode selection table in the power support state and the non-reversible state, (C) shows a table showing correspondence between contents of each operation mode and reliability.

First, the outline of the rendering operation will be described with reference to (C). In this embodiment, 13 types of performance operations are set according to the reliability, the first and second performance operations have low reliability, and the third to sixth, eighth, and ninth performance operations have reliability. However, the sixth, seventh and tenth performance operations are set to have high reliability. When the sixth, seventh and tenth effect operations are executed, the result of the variable display game is not out of sync.

In the first effect operation, only the left effect device 2500 swings, and the third sub-display 25
The display of 80 does not change. Note that after the slide movement, the effect image may be displayed and immediately returned to the reference position. In the second effect operation, the left effect device 2500 slides to the front of the main display device 35, indicating the occurrence of reach.

In the third effect operation, after the slide movement, the third sub-display 2580 is reversed in the forward direction (for example, clockwise), suggesting the occurrence of SP reach 1. The fourth effect operation is the same as the third effect operation,
The third sub-display 2580 reverses in the positive direction, indicating the occurrence of SP reach 2. In the fifth effect operation, after the slide movement, the third sub-display 2580 is reversed in the reverse direction (for example, counterclockwise)
This suggests the occurrence of SP reach 3. As in the fifth effect operation, the sixth effect operation indicates that the third sub-display 2580 is reversed in the reverse direction, and the SP reach 4 is generated. In the seventh effect operation, after the slide movement, the third sub-display 2580 is reversed in the reverse direction, suggesting that a big hit has occurred.

In the eighth effect operation, the left effect device 2500 swings and an effect suggesting the occurrence of reach is executed on the third sub-display 2580. In the ninth effect operation, the left effect device 2500 swings,
The third sub-display 2580 performs an effect suggesting the occurrence of SP reach. In the tenth effect operation, the left effect device 2500 swings, and an effect suggesting that a big hit has occurred is executed on the third sub-display 2580.

In the aspect selection table, a highly reliable presentation operation is set corresponding to a highly reliable variation pattern. Referring to (A), in the mode selection table 1 set when the inversion of the third sub-display 2580 is not restricted in the normal gaming state, the first or second effect is produced when the variation pattern is equal to or less than the normal reach. The action is executed. On the other hand, in the variation pattern in which the SP1 to SP3 reach occurs, in addition to the first and second effect operations, effects (third to fifth effect operations) suggesting the corresponding reach can be executed. When the SP4 reach occurs, the second to tenth effect operations can be executed.

On the other hand, referring to (B), when the normal power support state or inversion of the third sub-display 2580 is restricted, the third, second, and eighth to eighth states that the third sub-display 2580 does not invert. Ten performance operations are executed corresponding to the variation pattern with high reliability.

When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, it is difficult to select a performance operation with low reliability, and it is easy to select a performance operation with high reliability. On the other hand, in the case of detachment, it is easy to select a performance operation with low reliability, and it is difficult to select a performance operation with high reliability. The production operation with medium reliability is set so that the production operation with low reliability and the production operation with high reliability are executed in a balanced manner.

Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. 151. When the mode selection table is set, main control microcomputer 710 determines a notice mode according to the variation (effect) pattern from the set mode selection table (step B8305). Furthermore, the execution timing (preliminary timing) of the development (implying) notice effect is determined according to the result of the special figure variation display game (step B8306). The execution timing of the development (suggestion) notice effect is, in principle, before the occurrence of reach, but may be after the occurrence of reach in the case of an effect operation indicating that the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit.

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 sets execution information of the development (implying) notice effect according to the notice mode and the notice timing of the development (implying) notice effect (step B8206). Thereafter, a development (implying) notice effect is executed based on the set execution information (step B1522 in FIG. 141).

[Example of development (suggestion) notice]
Subsequently, a specific example of the advance (implying) notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155.
FIGS. 153 and 154 are diagrams for explaining an example of a development (implying) notice effect in the normal gaming state (reversible) according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 153 and FIG. 154 (A) and (B) are common, and the special figure variation display game is being executed, and shows a state before execution of the development (suggestion) notice effect. Here, typical four types of effect operations in which left effect device 2500 slides will be described.

First, common operations (A) and (B) will be described. In (A), first, the left effect device 2500 swings to suggest movement. At this time, the second sub-display 158
At 0, an image suggesting the movement of the left effect device 2500 is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in (B), the left effect device 2500 slides to the center of the main display 35 and displays a development suggestion image on the third sub-display 2580. The second sub-display 1580 displays an image indicating that the left effect device 2500 has moved. In addition,
As shown in (E), on the third sub-display 2580, in addition to the development suggestion image, the time until the next regular effect is continuously displayed even during the slide movement.

In addition, when the left effect device 2500 is slid, the identification symbol variably displayed on the main display 35 cannot be visually recognized. Accordingly, the variation display area is reduced or moved in accordance with the movement, and the entire variation display of the identification symbol is performed. May be visible. Furthermore, the left part production device 25
00 slides to the center of the main display 35 (in front of the middle symbol variation area)
You may make it move ahead of the left design fluctuation area or the right design fluctuation area. Further, the destination of the left effect device 2500 may be determined according to the reliability of the special figure variation display game.

A case will be described in which a transition is made from (C1) to (D1) after transition from (A) to (B). In this case, after the left effect device 2500 slides, it swings and returns to the reference position without being reversed (C1). Further, as shown in (D1), reach does not occur, and thereafter, the special figure variation display game is ended and the deviation is determined. In addition, the second sub-display 1580 displays an image indicating that the degree of expectation is low, and the third sub-display 2580 displays the original display content when returning to the reference position.

Next, a case where the transition from (A) to (B) and then the transition from (C2) to (D2) will be described. In this case, in response to the second effect operation, after the left effect device 2500 slides, a development suggestion image that suggests the occurrence of reach is displayed (C2). The development suggestion image displayed at this time may be the presence or absence of reach occurrence, or an image suggesting the type of reach that occurs. Thereafter, as shown in (D1), the left effect device 2500 returns to the reference position, and reach occurs. The second sub display 1580 displays an image suggesting that the degree of expectation is high, and the third sub display 2580 continuously displays the development suggestion image. Note that the display on the third sub-display 2580 may be restored to the original display content when the display returns to the reference position.

Next, a case where the transition from (A) to (B) is followed by the transition from (C3) to (D3) will be described. In this case, corresponding to the third and fourth effect operations, the left effect device 2500 slides and then rotates in the right direction (forward direction), and the rear surface disposed on the rear surface side of the third sub-display 2580. The light emitting unit faces the player side (C3). At this time, the output of the third sub-display 2580 may be maintained as it is, or it is in a dark display state (image non-display) in consideration of reflection on the main display 35, or the brightness is reduced. The energy saving display state may be set, or the display may be turned off. The state of the third sub-display 2580 at the time of inversion will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, the third sub-display 2580 is inverted and a development suggestion image is displayed (D3). The development suggestion image is, for example, an image that suggests the type of reach (SP1 reach or SP2 reach). Thereafter, the left effect device 2500 returns to the reference position, and the suggested reach effect (development variation) is executed.

In (C1), when the rotation direction of the third sub-display 2580 is reversed, the corresponding reach type corresponds to the fifth and sixth effect operations, and the suggested reach type is SP3 reach or SP4 reach.

Finally, a case where the transition from (A) to (B) and then the transition from (C4) to (D4) will be described. In this case, the back surface light emitting unit disposed on the back side of the third sub-display 2580 corresponds to the seventh effect operation and rotates in the left direction (reverse direction) after the left effect device 2500 slides. To the player side (C4). Further, the third sub-display 2580 is inverted, and a development suggestion image indicating that it is a big hit is displayed (D4). Thereafter, the left effect device 2500 returns to the reference position, and an effect (development variation) indicating that the reach effect or the big hit is confirmed is executed. Note that the reverse direction of the left effect device 2500 may be a positive direction.

As described above, the slide suggestion effect is performed by executing the swing suggestion effect (predictive effect) before the slide movement from the reference position, and the rock movement is performed before the slide movement to return to the reference position is executed. By not performing the moving suggestion effect (predictive effect), it is possible to prevent the effect on the main display 35 from becoming difficult to see.

Next, the case where the power transmission is being supported or the inversion of the left effect device 2500 is restricted will be described. FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating an example of the development (suggestion) notice effect in the ordinary power support state (inversion not possible) according to the second embodiment of this invention.

In the case where the reversal of the left effect device 2500 is restricted, the left effect device 2500 is not slid without moving the left effect device 2500 except when the second effect operation is selected, as shown in FIG. The development (suggestion) notice effect is suggested by the effect device 2500 swinging.

Furthermore, as shown in (B), the development suggestion image is displayed in a state where the left effect device 2500 is still placed at the reference position. The player can visually recognize the development suggestion image through the transparent game board 32. At the time of (B), as shown in (D), a period until the regular effect is executed is displayed on the development suggestion image.

Finally, as shown in (C), the type of reach is suggested to the third sub-display 2580, and the development (implying) notice effect ends.

Here, the display image of the third sub-display 2580 when the left effect device 2500 is reversed will be described. FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an image displayed on the third sub-display 2580 when the left effect device 2500 is reversed in the development (suggestion) notice effect according to the second embodiment of this invention.

In (A), an image including at least one of the remaining time, the previous image, the next image, and the background image is continuously displayed as it is. In (B), the image displayed in (A) is displayed while reducing the lightness and suppressing power consumption. In (C), an image dedicated for facing down is displayed, and in (D), the brightness of the image dedicated for facing down is reduced and displayed. Note that, by displaying the display image in a dark color, the brightness of the display image can be lowered with relatively simple control. In addition to reducing the brightness of the image, the brightness of part or all of the backlight of the third sub-display 2580 may be reduced.

In the case of (B) or (D), the main display 35 (first display) in which the display (light or image) of the third sub-display 2580 (second display means) in the reverse state is located rearward. Since it is possible to suppress (make difficult to give) adverse effects such as being difficult to see the display on the main display 35 due to being reflected in the means), it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In (E), black display with the brightness reduced to the minimum or no display at which no image is displayed. In (F), the power supply of the third sub-display 2580 is set to OFF so that power is not consumed. Even in this case, the reflection on the main display 35 (first display means) can be suppressed.

In addition, in the case where the decoration frame member 2573 of the third sub-display 2580 is provided with a plurality of light emitters such as LEDs, part or all of the light emitters do not emit light while they are facing down. You may control so that the brightness | luminance of a part or all of a light-emitting body may be reduced. Note that while the third sub-display 2580 is in the face-up state, it is preferable to turn off the back light-emitting portion or reduce the luminance.

As described above, it is possible to suppress power consumption by reducing the brightness and brightness of the image, hiding the image, or turning off the power of the display device in a face-down state that cannot be visually recognized by the player. Become. Further, when the previous image, the background image, or the like is continuously displayed, the control load is reduced because the image need not be updated. Further, when displaying the next image, it is not necessary to update the image in consideration of the rotation timing of the third sub-display 2580 to the face-up state.
Timing control is simplified.

[Step-up notice effect]
Next, the step-up (SU) notice effect will be described. The step-up notice effect is an effect in which the left effect device 2500 slides forward of the main display 35 and displays a notice image for each step. At this time, the second sub-display 1580 displays a dialogue or an image corresponding to the step-up effect. The higher the number of steps, the higher the degree of expectation.

[Step-up notice effect setting process]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of step-up (SU) notice mode setting processing according to the second embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 sets a step number selection table (step B).
8401). In the step number selection table, the number of steps in the step-up notice effect is set according to the variation (effect) pattern. FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating an example of the step number selection table according to the second embodiment of this invention. Referring to FIG. 158, the number of steps is set so as to increase in a fluctuation pattern having a high expectation degree of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of steps is set to 5.

The main control microcomputer 710 determines the number of steps for image step-up (SU) notice based on the variation (effect) pattern from the set step number selection table (step B).
8402).

Furthermore, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the reverse regulation flag is set (step B8403). If the reverse restriction flag is set (step B84)
If the result of 03 is “Y”), the processing after step B8408 is executed. In the step-up notice of this embodiment, an image corresponding to each step is displayed on the third sub-display 2580 of the left effect device 2500, but the third sub-display 2580 is reversed during the execution of the step-up notice. There may be a case where a step skip notice is executed in which one or more steps are skipped.
When the reversal restriction flag is set, since the reversal of the third sub-display 2580 is restricted, it is necessary to restrict the execution of the step skip notification, and the presence / absence of the reversal restriction flag is determined.

When the reverse control flag is not set, the main control microcomputer 710 (step B
The result of 8301 is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not to execute the step skipping effect based on the result of the special figure variation display game being executed and the number of notice steps (step B8404, step B).
8405), when the step skip effect is not executed (the result of step B8405 is “
N "), and the processing after step B8408 is executed.

The main control microcomputer 710 performs step skip production (step B84).
The result of 05 is “Y”), and the number of steps to be skipped is determined based on the number of notice steps and the variation (effect) pattern (step B 8406). Further, a skipped step is determined based on the number of advance notice steps and the number of skipped steps (step B8407). after that,
Execution information for the image step-up notice is set based on the decision items corresponding to the step-up notice effect (step B8408).

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state in order to determine whether or not to execute the speech step-up notice on the second sub-display 1580 ( Step B8409). If the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (the result of step B8409 is “N”), this process is terminated. When not in the normal gaming state, that is, in the normal power support state, the second sub-display 1580 performs the special 2 digestion on-hold effect, so the second sub-display 1580 cannot execute the speech step-up notice. Because.

When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the main control microcomputer 710 (step B8).
If the result of 409 is “Y”), it is determined by lottery whether or not the speech step-up notice is executed (step B8410). Then, it is determined whether or not the serif step-up notice is to be executed (step B8411). When the serif step-up notice is not to be executed (the result of step B8411 is “N”), this process ends.

On the other hand, when executing the serif step-up notice (the result of step B8411 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines the type and start timing of the serif step-up notice (step B8412). At this time, the type and start timing of the speech step-up notice may be determined according to the execution information of the image step-up notice.

Finally, the main control microcomputer 710 sets execution information of the serif step-up notice corresponding to the determined type and start timing of the serif step-up notice (step B8).
413), this processing is terminated.

[Example of step-up notice effect]
Next, a specific example of the step-up notice will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 159 and 160 are diagrams illustrating an example of the step-up notice effect according to the second embodiment of this invention. The step-up notice includes an image step-up notice executed by the third sub-display 2580 and a serif step-up notice executed by the second sub-display 1580. The image step-up notice and the dialog step-up notice are started at the same time or at different times, but only one of them may be performed.

(A) shows a state in which the step-up notice is started in the special figure fluctuation display game being executed. At the start of the step-up notice, an image or message indicating the start of the step-up notice is displayed on the second sub-display 1580 as a serif step-up notice (
Step 1). In addition, at the start of the step-up notice, the left effect device 2500 including the third sub-display 2580 swings (executes a sign effect (movement suggesting effect)).

Thereafter, as shown in (B), the left effect device 2500 slides forward of the main display 35, the step 1 preview image is displayed on the third sub-display 2580, and the image step-up preview is started. . At this time, the serif step up notice advances to step 2 and the corresponding serif is displayed. Although not shown, information on the next execution time of the regular effect is continuously displayed on the third sub-display 2580.

Note that when the left effect device 2500 is slid forward in front of the main display 35, the variable display of the identification symbol is interrupted. Therefore, during the execution of the image step-up advance notice, the variable display area can be reduced and the entire display can be viewed. It may be made to become. Further, the destination of the left effect device 2500 is not limited to the front of the middle symbol variation display area (medium variation display area), but may be the front of the left variation display area or the right variation display area. Further, the movement destination may be changed according to the reliability. Further, the step-up notice may be executed while reciprocating between the front of the left variation display area and the front of the right variation display area. in this way,
The execution of the image step-up notice (step-up display effect) can be boosted by the effect operation of the left effect device 2500 (effect display means).

When the number of image step-up advance notice steps ends with 1, as shown in (B2), the left effect device 2500 returns to the reference position, the reach does not occur, and the result of the special figure variation display game is lost. It becomes. At this time, the right symbol stops with identification information of ± 2 or more of the left symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG.
The sub-display 2580 displays the step 2 preview image. At this time, the serif step up notice advances to step 3 and the corresponding serif is displayed.

When the number of image step-up notice steps ends at 2, as shown in (C2), the left effect device 2500 returns to the reference position, and reach occurs with a low probability. At this time, the right symbol stops with identification information within ± 2 of the left symbol, and no reach, normal reach, or SP1 reach occurs.

Further, as shown in (D), when the image step-up advance notice develops to Step 3, the Step 3 notice image is displayed on the third sub-display 2580. At this time, the serif step up notice advances to step 4 and the corresponding serif is displayed.

When the number of image step-up notice steps ends at 3, as shown in (D2), the left effect device 2500 returns to the reference position, and reach occurs in most cases.

Further, as shown in (E), when the image step-up advance notice develops to step 4, the step 4 advance notice image is displayed on the third sub-display 2580. At this time, the serif step-up notice advances to step 5 and a serif indicating that the degree of expectation is high is displayed.

When the number of image step-up notice steps ends at 4, as shown in (E2), the left effect device 2500 returns to the reference position, and reach always occurs (develops to reach).
.

Further, as shown in (F), when the image step-up advance notice develops to Step 5, the Step 5 notice image is displayed on the third sub-display 2580. In the present embodiment, when the number of steps of the image step-up notice reaches 5, the step-up notice ends, the left effect device 2500 returns to the reference position, and SP reach always occurs.

As described above, it is possible to execute the image step-up notice that attracts the player's eyes by sliding the left effect device 2500 and displaying the notice image for each step on the third sub-display 2580. It has become.

[Step skip notice]
In the step-up notice described above, the step notice image was displayed at each step, but some players were surprised by skipping some steps,
A step skip notice that can execute a variety of effects will be described. In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a short step skip notice in which the notice time is shorter than when no step is skipped, and a long step skip notice in which the notice time is the same as when the step is not skipped.

161A and 161B are diagrams for explaining an example of a short step skip notice according to the second embodiment of this invention. 161A shows a case where two steps are skipped, and FIG. 161B shows a case where three steps are skipped. In either case of FIG. 161A and FIG. 161B, a step-up notice with 5 steps is provided. In the examples shown in FIGS. 161A and 161B, the speech step-up advance notice is not executed. However, in response to the step skipping of the image step-up advance notice, the speech step-up advance notice is also performed within the range of the number of steps. You may make it skip.

First, referring to FIG. 161A, (A) and (B
), The image step-up advancement proceeds to step 2. The operation so far is the same as the step-up notice described above.

Then, at the timing of shifting to step 3, as shown in FIG.
00 is reversed, the back light emitting portion is visible, and the visibility of the third sub-display 2580 is restricted (second state). At this time, the left effect device 2500 is stopped or an effect by the back surface light emitting part is executed until a time corresponding to one step or less elapses.

Thereafter, as shown in (D), the left effect device 2500 is further reversed, and the third sub-display 2580 becomes visible (first state). At this time, the step 5 preview image is displayed,
The display of the step 3 preview image and the step 4 preview image is skipped. Thereafter, similarly to the normal step-up notice with the number of steps of 5, the left effect device 2500 slides to the reference position, and SP reach is executed.

As described above, when stepping up in the step-up notice, the third sub-display 2
By restricting the visual recognition of 580, it is possible to divide and execute the first and second half of the step-up notice, and to emphasize (impress) the step-up feeling of the image step-up notice.

In addition, when the step skip notification is executed, the player can easily understand the difference from the image step-up notification without step skipping by operating the third sub-display 2580 so that the visual recognition of the third sub-display 2580 is restricted. The effect of the step-up notice effect can be enhanced. Further, by restricting the visual recognition of the third sub-display 2580 at the timing of skipping the display effect at the middle step, it is possible to execute step skipping without a sense of incongruity.

Next, a step-up notice for skipping three steps will be described with reference to FIG. 161B. As shown in (A), when the image step-up advancement progresses to Step 1, at the timing of shifting to Step 2, as shown in (B), the left effect device 2500 is inverted,
The back side light emitting part is in a visible state. At this time, the left effect device 2500 may be reversed in the opposite direction to the two-step skipping in FIG. 161A.
The ratio of the inversion direction may be changed by causing the step skipping to perform the inversion operation in both directions.

Thereafter, as shown in (C), the left effect device 2500 is further reversed, and the third sub-display 2580 becomes visible. At this time, a step 5 preview image is displayed, and steps 2 to 2 are displayed.
Step 4 The display of the preview image is skipped. Thereafter, similarly to the normal step-up notice with the number of steps of 5, the left effect device 2500 slides to the reference position, and SP reach is executed.

Next, the long step skip notice will be described. 162A and 162B are
It is a figure explaining an example of the long step skip notice of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. FIG.
62A shows a case where two steps are skipped, and FIG. 162B shows a case where three steps are skipped.
In the example shown in FIGS. 162A and 162B, the serif step-up notice is not executed.

As shown in (A), when the image step-up notice is started and proceeds to step 1, at the timing of shifting to step 2, as shown in (B), the left effect device 2500 is reversed and the back side light emitting unit Becomes visible.

Further, as shown in (C), the left effect device 2500 swings, and an effect (swing effect) is performed to increase the player's expectation by repeatedly emitting light, swinging, and stopping by the back light emitting unit. To do. Since the long step skip notice has the same effect time as the normal step up notice, the two-step time is consumed to execute the effect.

Thereafter, as shown in (D), the left effect device 2500 is inverted, and the third sub-display 258 is reversed.
0 becomes visible. At this time, the step 4 preview image is displayed, and the display of the step 2 and step 3 preview images is skipped. Thereafter, similarly to the normal step-up notice of the number of steps 4, the left effect device 2500 slides to the reference position, and the reach effect is executed.

Subsequently, referring to FIG. 162B, (A) to (C) are the same as FIG. 162A.
In (B), the direction in which the left effect device 2500 is reversed may be changed according to the number of steps skipped.

When the roaring effect ends, as shown in (D), the left effect device 2500 is reversed, the step 5 preview image is displayed on the third sub-display 2580, and the display of the step 2 to step 4 preview image is skipped. The After that, as in the normal step-up notice with 5 steps,
The left effect device 2500 slides to the reference position, and the reach effect is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, in addition to a normal step-up notice that displays an image corresponding to each step, a step skip notice that skips some steps can be executed. FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating the effect execution time of various step-up notices (step number 5) according to the second embodiment of this invention. The normal step time is a fixed period (predetermined period).

(A) shows the execution time of a normal image step-up notice effect with 5 steps. An effect for a predetermined period is executed in each step.

(B) and (C) are advance notices for skipping one step. In (B), step 2 is skipped, and in (C), step 3 is skipped. In this case, the step skipping period may be the same as the predetermined period or may be shorter than the predetermined period. Note that the one-step skip notice that skips step 4 is not executed.

(D) to (F) are short step skip notices, step (D) is step 2 and step 3, step (E) is step 3 and step 4, step (E) is step 2 to step 4 skipped. It is. In the short step skip notice, as described above, even if a plurality of steps are skipped, a skip period is set for a predetermined period of one step. Note that the skip period may be set shorter than a predetermined period of one step. Further, in the case of a short step skip notice, the left effect device 2500 is configured to swing only once before the third sub-display 2580 is turned face up.

(G) to (I) are long step skip notices, (D) is step 2 and step 3, (E) is step 3 and step 4, and (E) is step 2 to step 4.
The steps up to are skipped. In the long step skip notification, as described above, the same skip period as that in the case of not skipping a step is set. At this time, the number of times the left effect device 2500 swings is set corresponding to the number of steps skipped. Since the skipping period is set to be long in the long step skip notification, the number of times that the left effect device 2500 swings may be set to increase.

[Modification of step-up notice effect]
Furthermore, a modified example of the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 164 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the step-up notice effect according to the second embodiment of this invention.

From the start of the step-up notice to the execution of step 1 of the image step-up notice, the process is the same as that shown in FIG. 159 as shown in FIGS. (C)
In this modification, before the step-up notice ends, the third sub-display 25
In step 80, the left effect device 2500 is controlled to return to the reference position in a state where the step 1 preview image is displayed. At this time, the display of the dialog step-up notice returns to step 1. If the image step-up notice does not end, it may not be possible to return to the reference position. When the image step-up advance notice is finished, the fact that the step-up notice is finished is displayed as a speech step-up advance notice, and the running special figure variation display game is continued.

When the image step-up notice continues, as shown in (D), the image slides again to the front of the main display 35 and the step 2 notice image is displayed. At this time, the display corresponding to step 3 of the speech step-up notice is made on the second sub-display 1580. Further, when the step-up notice continues, the second sub-display 2580 returns to the reference position with the step 2 notice image displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in (F) and (G), the image step-up notice is advanced to step 5. Also in this modification, the above-described step skip notice may be combined.

[Display example when the third sub display is reversed]
In the present embodiment, when the step skip announcement effect is executed, the left effect device 2500 is inverted, so that the player cannot visually recognize the third sub-display 2580. The display on the third sub-display 2580 in this case will be described. FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating an image displayed on the third sub-display 2580 when the left effect device 2500 is reversed in the long step skip notification effect according to the second embodiment of this invention. In FIG. 165, step 2
A case where three steps from step 4 to step 4 are skipped will be described.

In (A), the display of the preview image for each step as usual is continued during inversion. (B
) Is displayed in the same manner as (A), but the brightness is reduced and the power consumption is reduced. Even if the visual recognition of the third sub-display 2580 is restricted, it is possible to suppress the display control from being complicated by continuing the display, and a normal image step-up advance notice and a step skip image can be suppressed. The execution process of the display effect of the step-up notice can be made common (module). It is also possible to display data (display by motion data) that is a series of movies before and after inversion.

Further, in the case of (A) and (B), only the background image may be hidden during inversion. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load of drawing processing during inversion.

In the case of (A) or (B), the player may return the third sub-display 2580 to be visible when the player operates the effect button 17 during inversion. Since the notice display is continued even during inversion, it is possible to process smoothly. Further, the effect of step-up notice can be enhanced by the player's operation.

In (C), some information included in the same preview image is selected and displayed. (D)
The display content is the same as in C) and the brightness is lowered. In (E), black display or no display is performed without displaying an image. In (F), the power supply of the third sub-display 2580 is temporarily set to OFF.

On the other hand, in the short step skip notice effect, the player cannot visually recognize the third sub-display 2580 for a period of one step. FIG. 166 shows the third sub-display 25 when the left effect device 2500 is reversed in the short step skip notice effect according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. FIG. 166 describes a case where three steps from step 2 to step 4 are skipped, as in the case of FIG. 165.

In (A), an image including at least one of the remaining time, the previous image, the next image, and the background image is continuously displayed. In (B), the image displayed in (A) is displayed while reducing the lightness and suppressing power consumption.

In (C), an image dedicated for facing down is displayed, and in (D), the brightness of the image dedicated for facing down is reduced and displayed. In (E), black display with the brightness reduced to the minimum or no display at which no image is displayed. In (F), the power supply of the third sub-display 2580 is set to OFF so that power is not consumed.

Since the skipped step display can be omitted in the short step skip notice effect, the control load for executing the image step-up notice can be reduced.

Further, in the case of a long step skip notice effect with a long period in which the third sub display 2580 and the main display 35 are opposed (period in which the third sub display 2580 is reversed), the third sub display The brightness of the effect image of the device 2580 is set low, and in the case of the short step skip notice effect, the brightness is set high (maintained the same as before), so that it is low when the reflection does not matter. It is possible to suppress control from becoming complicated by not performing lightness display.

Further, when the third sub-display 2580 is inverted and further inverted and returned to the front side, the step may not be skipped (gase step skip). For example, after displaying the step 1 preview image, the third sub-display 2580 may be reversed, and then further reversed and returned to the front side, the step 2 preview image may be displayed. By comprising in this way, the production rich in variation can be performed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the effect of the step-up notice effect is enhanced, and the interest of the game can be effectively improved. In the present embodiment, the reverse direction of the third sub-display 2580 to the back-facing state and the reverse direction to the forward-facing state are opposite directions, but they may be the same direction.

[Elevation notice effect]
Finally, the up / down notice effect will be described. Ascending / descending notice effect is the lower elevating unit 1100
This is an effect in which the movable unit 1110 that constitutes is moved up and down in front of the main display 35 to give a notice (improvement) of the expected degree of the variable display game being executed.

[Elevation notice execution process]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the elevation notice mode setting process according to the second embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the gaming state is a normal gaming state (
Step B8501). In the normal gaming state (the result of step B8501 is “Y”)
Then, the operation mode selection table 1 is set as a table for selecting the mode of raising / lowering notice according to the game state (step B8502). For details of the operation mode selection table 1,
This will be described with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is not the normal gaming state, the main control microcomputer 710 (step B8).
If the result of 501 is “N”), for example, in the case of the normal power support state, the operation mode selection table 2 is set (step B8503). Details of the operation mode selection table 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining an aspect of the ascending / descending notice effect according to the second embodiment of this invention.
A) shows an operation mode selection table in the normal gaming state, and (B) shows an operation mode selection table in the general power support state.

In the operation mode selection table, a highly reliable presentation operation is set corresponding to a highly reliable variation pattern. Referring to the operation mode selection table 1 shown in (A), when the variation pattern is equal to or less than the normal reach, the effect by the lower lift unit 1100 is not executed.
Or it becomes an effect only that the movable unit 1110 swings (executes a sign effect (movement suggestion effect)).

On the other hand, when the variation pattern is SP1 reach, in addition to the effect that the movable unit 1110 swings, a short rise in which the movable unit 1110 rises by a short distance (or a short time) can be selected. When the variation pattern is SP2 reach or SP3 reach, a short rise or a long rise that rises a longer distance (or longer time) than the case where the movable unit 1110 is a short rise can be selected. Highly reliable S
In the case of P4 reach, long rise is selected.

On the other hand, referring to the operation mode selection table 2 shown in (B), as in the normal gaming state, when the variation pattern is equal to or less than normal reach, the effect by the movable unit 1110 is not executed, or the movable unit 1110 does not swing. It is an effect that only moves. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is SP1 reach or more, short rise or long rise is selected.

Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. 167. When the operation mode selection table is set, main control microcomputer 710 determines an ascending / descending notice mode corresponding to the variation (effect) pattern from the set mode selection table (step B8504). Furthermore, the execution timing (preliminary timing) of the ascending / descending notice effect is determined according to the result of the special figure variation display game (step B8505). The execution timing of the ascending / descending notice may be before the occurrence of reach or after the occurrence of reach.

Finally, the main control microcomputer 710 sets the execution information of the ascending / descending notice effect according to the notice mode and notice timing of the ascending / descending notice effect (step B8506). Thereafter, the up / down notice effect is executed in the up / down notice effect execution process based on the set execution information (FIG. 141).
Step B1524). Details of the up / down notice effect execution processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Elevation notice execution process]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the up / down notice effect execution process according to the second embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the advance notice is set, that is, whether or not execution information for the advance notice is set (step B8601). If the execution information for raising / lowering advance notice is not set (the result of step B8601 is “N”), this process ends.

The main control microcomputer 710 determines whether it is the execution start timing (notification start timing) of the ascending / descending notice when the execution information of the ascending / descending notice is set (the result of step B8601 is “Y”). (Step B8602). When it is not the notice start timing (the result of Step B8602 is “N”), the processing after Step B8607 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is the advance notice start timing of the advance notice (the result of Step B8602 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 includes an ascending action, that is, a short rise or a long rise. Whether or not (step B8603). When the ascending motion is not included (the result of Step B8603 is “N”), the processing after Step B8607 is executed.

The main control microcomputer 710, when the operation mode includes the ascending operation (step B86
If the result of 03 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the start storage hold notice is being executed (step B8604). When the hold notice is not being executed (the result of step B8604 is “N”)
Then, the processing after step B8607 is executed.

The main control microcomputer 710 determines that the start memory hold notice is being executed (step B).
If the result of 8604 is “Y”), the movement of the hold display area is set to prevent the hold display area from being visually recognized by the movable unit 1110 (step B8605). Furthermore, the start of the advance notice for which execution information is set is set (step B8606).
.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the advance notice is being executed (step B8607). When the advance notice is being executed (the result of step B8607 is “Y
]), The update of the notice operation is set (step B8608).

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not to end the advance notice (step B).
8609). If the advance notice is not finished (the result of step B8609 is “N”), this process is finished.

On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 ends the up / down notice (step B8609).
Is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the hold display area is moving (step B8610).
). If it is moving (the result of step B8610 is “Y”), the return of the hold display area is set (step B8611), and this process is terminated.

[Elevation notice example]
Next, a specific example of raising / lowering notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172. Fig. 170
These are figures explaining an example of the raising / lowering notice effect in case the pending | holding notice of the start memory | storage of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is not performed.

(A) shows a state immediately before the special figure fluctuation display game is finished and the special figure fluctuation display game based on the earliest start memory is executed. (B) shows the state where the first start memory is digested and the special figure variation display game is started. (C) shows a state in which reach has occurred in the special figure fluctuation display game being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 170, the advance notice is executed after the occurrence of reach.

(D) shows a state in which the advance notice is started and the movable unit 1110 is raised. In the example shown in FIG. 170, since the color of the hold display corresponding to each start-up memory is “white” and no hold notice is made, even if the movable unit 1110 moves to the front of the hold display area, the hold display area is not displayed. It is displayed as it is without being moved. As described above, when the pre-reading notice is not executed, it is possible to grasp that the holding notice is not being executed by not moving the hold display area. Moreover, the load regarding display processing can be reduced by not moving the display.

Note that the hold display area may be hidden while being shielded by the movable unit 1110. By hiding the hold display area, the load of drawing processing can be reduced. Further, by configuring the movable unit 1110 with a transparent member, the hold display area may be visible while being shielded.

Next, a case where a hold notice is performed will be described. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining an example of the ascending / descending notice effect in the case where the start memory hold notice is performed by the operation timing of the movable unit 1110 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

(A) is the same as FIG. 170 (A). Referring to (B), at the start of the special figure variation display game, a hold notice is made in which one of the hold displays changes from “white” to “blue”. Therefore, when reach occurs as shown in (C) and the movable unit 1110 starts to rise,
As shown in (D), the hold display area is moved so that the player can recognize that the hold notice is being executed.

The destination of the hold display area is moved to a position that is not blocked by the operations of the top effect device 400, the right effect device 1500, and the left effect device 2500. Further, the shape of the hold display area is changed according to the state of the movement destination. In the normal state, the special 1 hold display area and the special 2 hold display area are displayed on a straight line. However, as shown in FIG. 4D, the special 1 hold display area and the special 2 hold display area are displayed in two rows. It has come to be.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to avoid the inconvenience that the reserved display area cannot be visually recognized by the operation of the lower lifting unit 1100, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player that the pre-reading notice (holding notice) is being executed.

When the movable unit 1110 is lowered and the advance notice is finished, the hold display area is returned to the original position as shown in (E). In addition, it may be in a state of moving until the running special figure variation display game is finished. By doing so, it is possible to avoid that the hold notice becomes difficult to grasp due to repeated movement of the hold display area.

Finally, a modified example in the case where a hold notice is being performed will be described. FIG. 172 is a diagram for explaining a modification example of the ascending / descending notice effect in the case where the start memory hold notice is performed by the operation timing of the movable unit 1110 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

(A) and (B) are the same as FIGS. 170 (A) and (B). Then, as shown in (C), a new start memory is generated before the reach occurs in the special figure variation display game, and the newly generated start memory hold display is changed from “white” to “blue”. A changing hold notice is being made.

In the example shown in FIG. 171, the hold display area is controlled to move, but in this modification, the movable unit 1110 is not operated (raised) and any one of the sub-displays is operated. Substituting for advance notice. In this case, any one of the first sub-display 400, the second sub-display 1580, and the third sub-display 2580 may be used, but the normal power support state in which the first sub-display 400 is in the variable display area. Then, the first sub-display 400 is not used.

The embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined not by the above description of the invention but by the scope of the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment, but also to a slot machine in addition to a gaming machine using a gaming ball such as an arranged ball gaming machine or a sparrow ball gaming machine. Applicable.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 2 Main body frame 4 Opening / closing frame 5 Front frame 5a Storage part 5d Projection press part 6 Glass frame 17 Direction button 30 Game board 31 Game area 32 Game board 34 Center frame 34f Distribution space 34g 1st passage gate part (lottery gate) )
34h Second passage gate (fixed gate)
35 Fluctuating display device (main display device, first display device)
36 Normal start gate 37 First start prize opening (first start prize area)
38 2nd start prize opening (2nd start prize area)
40 general winning opening 41 first special variable winning device 42 second special variable winning device 50 collective display device 220 lower effect device 222 cover member 223 movable decorative member 240 upper decorative unit 241b, 274 magnetic sensor accommodating portion 243b, 275 dummy accommodating portion 276 Radio wave sensor housing unit 300 Rear side production device 330 Shutter unit 340 Rotating door 344 Magnetic body 400 Upper production device 470 Light guide plate 473 Decoration frame member 480 Display (second display device, first sub-display)
500 Right portion rendering device 580 Rotating cylinder 590 Infrared sensor (human sensor)
600 Game control device 607a First passage detection sensor 607b Second passage detection sensor 700 Production control device 710 Main control microcomputer (1st CPU)
712 RTC (Real Time Clock)
720 Microcomputer for video control (2nd CPU)
800 Power supply device 1000 Rotating mechanism unit 1001, 1002 Movable arm 1010 Moving mechanism unit 1100 Lower elevating unit 1110 Movable unit 1120 Elevating mechanism unit 1150 Operation space 1160 Standby space 1240 Reservation display area 1240a Special 1 reservation display area 1240b Special 2 reservation display area 1500 Right portion rendering device 1573 Decorative frame member 1580 Second sub display 2500 Left portion rendering device 2580 Third sub display 2581 Back side light emitting portion

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine capable of executing an auxiliary game based on establishment of a predetermined start condition and giving a predetermined game value based on a result of the auxiliary game,
First display means capable of displaying an effect image relating to the auxiliary game;
Second display means arranged to be separated from the first display means and capable of displaying an effect image relating to the auxiliary game;
Display control means for controlling the display of the first display means and the second display means;
A coalescing operation means capable of causing coalescence operation constituting the one screen I substantially rectangular display portions are adjacent if the said first display means and the second display means during execution of the auxiliary game ,
Coalescence suggesting means capable of executing a coalescence suggesting effect that suggests that the coalescence operation is performed by swinging at least one of the first display means and the second display means ,
The uniting operation unit causes the uniting operation to be performed so that opposing sides of the display units adjacent to each other form a plurality of modes when the first display unit and the second display unit perform the uniting operation. Is possible,
The display control means includes
A single image display means for displaying an independent effect image on each of the first display means and the second display means when the coalescing operation is not performed by the coalescing operation means;
When the united operation by the united operation means is being performed, and one body image display means for displaying the integral effect image to be straddled therefore be one body with the first display unit and the second display means, the Prepared,
The integral image display means includes
The integrated effect image can be displayed even if the front view shape of the one screen differs according to the aspect taken by the opposing sides of the display units of the first display unit and the second display unit by the uniting operation. A gaming machine characterized by that. The uniting operation unit performs the uniting operation so that opposing sides of the display units of the first display unit and the second display unit are in any one of a vertical mode, a horizontal mode, and an oblique mode. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of being played .

Images